GP600

Portable Radio

Service Manual
68P02909X01B

European Publications Department (RPG) Fleet, Hampshire, England

Issue: July 1997
ii
 Cautions and Warnings

CAUTION

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES

PRECAUTIONS SHOULD BE TAKEN TO MINIMIZE THE RISK OF DAMAGE BY

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE TO ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES (ESDs).

ANY DEVICES EMPLOYING METAL OXIDE SILICON (MOS) TECHNOLOGY ARE

PARTICULARLY SUSCEPTIBLE.

CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS MARKED WITH THE ABOVE SYMBOL INDICATE ELECTRONIC

CIRCUITS (PECs) FOR WHICH ESD HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ARE NECESSARY.

THE USER SHOULD REFER TO BS5783, 1984: HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC

SENSITIVE DEVICES. THIS BRITISH STANDARD SUPERSEDES DEF STAN 59-98,
ISSUE 2.

iii
Cautions and Warnings

iv
 Cautions and Warnings

SAFETY WARNINGS

THE ELECTRICAL POWER USED IN THIS EQUIPMENT IS AT A VOLTAGE

HIGH ENOUGH TO ENDANGER LIFE.

BEFORE CARRYING OUT MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR, PERSONS

CONCERNED MUST ENSURE THAT THIS EQUIPMENT IS ISOLATED
FROM THE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND TESTS ARE MADE TO ENSURE
THAT ISOLATION IS COMPLETE.

WHEN THE SUPPLY CANNOT BE ISOLATED, MAINTENANCE AND

REPAIR MUST BE UNDERTAKEN BY PERSONS WHO ARE FULLY
AWARE OF THE DANGERS INVOLVED AND WHO HAVE TAKEN
ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT THEMSELVES.

COMPONENTS CONTAINING BERYLLIUM OXIDE ARE USED IN THIS

EQUIPMENT. DUST FROM THIS MATERIAL IS A HEALTH HAZARD IF
INHALED OR ALLOWED TO COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE SKIN.

GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN WHEN HANDLING THESE

COMPONENTS WHICH MUST NOT BE BROKEN OR SUBJECTED TO
EXCESSIVE HEATING. DEFECTIVE COMPONENTS MUST BE
DISPOSED OF IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT INSTRUCTIONS.

v
Cautions and Warnings

vi
 Contents

Service Manual

Contents

Section
1.0 Introduction
Gives a brief introduction into the manual and the service policy.

2.0 Safety Information

Provides detailed information on safety aspects when servicing the radio.

3.0 Maintenance
Describes how to disassemble/assemble the radio for maintenance purposes
and provides lists of test equipment.

4.0 Troubleshooting
Provides troubleshooting charts to aid in the service of the radio.

5.0 Accessories
Provides a list of accesories for the GP600 radio.

6.0 Band Specific Information

Contains information in band specific sections. Each section contains the
following chapters:

(i) Model Charts and Technical Specifications

(ii) Radio Tuning Procedure
(iii) Theory of Operation
(iv) PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists

Appendix
A.0 PL (CTCSS) Codes

Service Manual vii

Contents

viii Service Manual

 Table of Contents

Chapter 1
Introduction
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Introduction ................................................................................................ 1

2.0 Scope of Manual ........................................................................................ 1

3.0 How to Use This Manual ............................................................................ 1

4.0 Warranty and Service Support ................................................................. 2

4.1 First 30 Days................................................................................................ 2
4.2 Warranty Period........................................................................................... 2
4.3 After Warranty.............................................................................................. 2
4.4 Piece Parts .................................................................................................. 3
4.5 Technical Support........................................................................................ 3

Introduction 1-i
Table of Contents

1-ii Introduction
 Introduction

1.0 Introduction

This chapter outlines the scope and use of the manual and provides an overview of the warranty and
service support.

2.0 Scope of Manual

This manual is intended for use by experienced technicians familiar with similar types of equipment.
It contains service information required for the equipment described and is current as of the printing
date. Changes which occur after the printing date maybe incorporated by a complete Service
Manual revision to your Product Manual or alternatively, as additions to Band Specific information.

3.0 How to Use This Manual

This Service Manual contains introductory chapters giving information on warranty, safety and
assembly/disassembly. Chapter 6 contains service information in band specific sub-chapters giving
information on models, test specifications, radio tuning, theory of operation and schematics/parts
lists. Refer to the Table of Contents for a general overview of the manual.

Introduction 1-1
Warranty and Service Support

4.0 Warranty and Service Support

Motorola offers long term support for its products. This support includes full exchange and/or repair
of the product. Any return-for-exchange or return-for-repair must be accompanied by a Warranty
Claim Form. Warranty Claim Forms are obtained by contacting Motorola Customer Services.

4.1 First 30 Days

If within 30 days of the date-of-purchase, a malfunction with the product is encountered, a check of
the product should be performed. The check should insure the product is correctly programmed and
is free from mechanical malfunctions. If the check doesn't solve the problem, please contact
Motorola Customer Services who will make arrangements for a full exchange on a product-for-
product basis. Any exchange under this program will require a Warranty Claim Form which is
available from Motorola Customer Services. The product is to be returned to Motorola prior to
exchange of the product, at the end-user’s expense, together with the Warranty Claim Form.

The return process may change from time to time. In order to ensure the fastest possible return to
Motorola, please contact the Motorola office where the product was purchased, for full details.

Please return the product in the original shipping carton with the original packing materials. If this is
not possible, package the product to assure no damage during transit.

4.2 Warranty Period

After 30 days from the date-of-purchase and for the remainder of the warranty period, the provisions
of the warranty are in effect. During this period, the product will be repaired or exchanged on a
product-for-product basis at the discretion of Motorola.

If a malfunction with the product is encountered, a check of the product should be performed. The
check should insure the product is correctly programmed and is free from mechanical malfunctions.
If the check doesn't solve the problem, please contact Motorola Customer Services who will make
arrangements for a return-for-repair. Any return- for-repair under this program will require a Warranty
Claim Form which is available from Customer Services. The product is to be returned, at the end-
user’s expense, together with the Warranty Claim Form to Motorola.

The return process may change from time to time. In order to ensure the fastest possible return to
Motorola, please contact the Motorola Customer Service office from where the product was
purchased, for full details. Please return the product in the original shipping carton with the original
packing materials. If this is not possible, package the product to assure no damage during transit.

4.3 After Warranty

After the warranty period, Motorola continues to support products through repair. Repair is handled
on a flat fee basis. The fees charged for this service depends on the product. The product is to be
returned at the end-user’s expense to Motorola.

The return process may change from time to time. In order to ensure the fastest possible return to
Motorola, please contact the nearest Motorola Service Depot for full details. Please return the
product in the original shipping carton with the original packing materials. If this is not possible,
package the product to assure no damage during transit.

1-2 Introduction
 Warranty and Service Support

4.4 Piece Parts

Some replacement parts, spare parts, and/or product information can be ordered directly. If a
complete Motorola part number is assigned to the part, it is available from Motorola. If a generic part
is listed or only a part description is listed, the part is not normally available from Motorola. If a parts
list is not included, this generally means that no user-serviceable parts are available for that kit or
assembly. All orders for parts/information should include the complete Motorola identification
number. All part orders should be directed to:

Motorola G.m.b.H.
European Parts Department
65232 Taunusstein
Germany

4.5 Technical Support

Motorola Product Services is available to assist the dealer/distributors in resolving any malfunctions
which may be encountered. Initial contact should be by telephone whenever possible. When
contacting Motorola Technical Support, be prepared with the product model number and the unit’s
serial number.

Introduction 1-3
Warranty and Service Support

1-4 Introduction
 Table of Contents

Chapter 2
Safety Information
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview ..................................................................................................... 1

2.0 General ....................................................................................................... 1

3.0 Hazardous Environments .......................................................................... 1

4.0 RF Exposure ............................................................................................... 1

5.0 Battery Considerations ............................................................................. 2

6.0 Charger Safety ........................................................................................... 2

Safety Information 2-i

Table of Contents

2-ii Safety Information

 Overview

1.0 Overview

This chapter gives safety information for the Portable radio.

2.0 General

While designed for rugged use, the radios are not indestructible. Some general guidelines to assure
long life of the radio are:

■ Always charge a battery before its initial use.

■ Always use only approved accessories. Unapproved accessories may damage the radio and
will invalidate the warranty.
■ Always keep accessory cover in-place and secure when accessories are not used.
■ Always charge the radio with the battery installed.
■ Keep battery contacts clean with a lint-free cloth.
■ DO NOT submerse radio in water or other liquids.
■ DO NOT clean the radio with petroleum based cleaning products, detergents or alcohol.
■ DO NOT carry the radio by the antenna or by any attached accessories.
■ DO NOT drop or throw the radio (Avoid rough or abusive treatment).
■ DO NOT operate the radio with the headset or similar options at high volume. Prolonged high
volume will result in hearing loss.

3.0 Hazardous Environments

The radios are not designed for use in Hazardous Environments! Other radios which are qualified for
use in hazardous environments are clearly labelled.

■ DO NOT operate the radio near unshielded explosive and/or explosives-detonation devices
such as blasting caps or electronic triggers.
■ DO NOT operate the radio in an explosive atmosphere or near explosive gases.
■ DO NOT attempt hazardous environment modification in the field or during repair.

4.0 RF Exposure

The radios perform well below the human RF exposure safety standards set for by Federal
Communications Commission General Docket action 79144, of March 13, 1985 when the safety
guidelines of this manual are followed. The guidelines are:

■ Hold the radio in a vertical upright position about 5-10 cm from the face so the antenna does
not touch, or come in close contact with any exposed parts of the body.
■ DO NOT press the transmit (PTT) unless transmitting.
■ DO NOT allow children to operate the radio.

Safety Information 2-1

Battery Considerations

5.0 Battery Considerations

The radios use Nickel-Cadmium batteries. Improper care and use of the batteries can lead to
damage of equipment, possible injury or affects on health. The proper care for these batteries
include:

WARNING: To prevent injury or burn, do not allow metal objects to contact or short
circuit the battery terminal.

■ DO NOT use new batteries before they are fully charged! New batteries are not charged.
■ DO NOT Quick-Rate charge new batteries. New batteries must be slow-charged the first time.
■ DO NOT transmit on a radio when the battery is being charged.
■ Use only Motorola Chargers. Use of other chargers void battery warranty and may damage
the battery and/or charger.
■ Use the charger only with the battery installed.
■ Charge batteries at about 77°F (25°C). Charging below 45°F (8°C) may cause damage and
leakage. Charging batteries over 95°F (34°C) reduces the battery charging capacity.
■ DO NOT get the batteries and/or charger wet during installation or charging.
■ DO NOT dispose of batteries by fire. High temperatures may result in explosion and/or
release of hazardous materials.
■ Dispose of batteries carefully. Batteries contain cadmium which is toxic. Batteries should be
recycled or disposed of with proper care.

6.0 Charger Safety

Before using a battery charger, read all instructions and cautions on the radio, the battery pack, the
battery charger and the charging adapter.

WARNING: Charge only Motorola Nickel-Cadmium, rechargeable battery packs. Other

types of batteries may burst and cause personal injury.

■ DO NOT transmit while the radio is charging.

■ DO NOT expose chargers to rain or snow.
■ DO NOT immerse the charger in liquids.
■ Use only approved attachments. Unapproved attachments may cause fire, shock, or injury.
■ DO NOT pull by the cord when disconnecting the charger.
■ Locate the cord so it will not be stepped on, tripped-over or damaged.
■ DO NOT use an extension cord. If an extension cord must be used, be sure it is in good
condition, the plug matches the charger and it uses at least 18AWG wire (16AWG over 100ft).
■ DO NOT operate the charger with damaged cord or plug.
■ DO NOT operate charger if it has received a sharp blow, has been dropped, or damaged.
■ Disconnect the charger before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.

2-2 Safety Information

 Table of Contents

Chapter 3
Maintenance
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview..................................................................................................... 1

2.0 How to Disassemble the Radio................................................................. 1

2.1 Remove the Battery ..................................................................................... 1
2.2 Remove the Chassis.................................................................................... 2
2.3 Remove the Main Board .............................................................................. 3
2.4 Remove the Front Housing Board ............................................................... 4

3.0 How to Reassemble the Radio.................................................................. 5

3.1 Reassemble the Front Housing Assembly................................................... 7

4.0 Mechanical Exploded View Diagram ........................................................ 9

5.0 Service Aids ............................................................................................. 10

6.0 Test Set Service Cable ............................................................................ 10

7.0 Test Equipment ........................................................................................ 11

Maintenance 3-i
Table of Contents

3-ii Maintenance
 Overview

1.0 Overview
3

This chapter explains, step by step, how to disassemble and assemble the radio. The chapter also
contains a list of test equipment required to service the radio.

2.0 How to Disassemble the Radio

2.1 Remove the Battery

1. The battery latches are located at the bottom of the radio on each side (Figure 3-1). Press
and hold both battery latches toward the front of the radio.

Figure 3-1 Press Battery Latch.

2. Press the battery housing against the radio, while sliding it down until it is free of the chassis
rails (Figure 3-2).
UHF

Battery
housing

Figure 3-2 Slide Battery Housing.

3. To remove the battery, pull it straight out and away from the radio.

Maintenance 3-1
How to Disassemble the Radio

2.2 Remove the Chassis

1. Pull the control knobs straight off.
2. Unscrew the antenna counter-clockwise until it is detached from the radio.
3. Carefully pry the chassis up on both sides, near the bottom, with a flat blade screwdriver
(Figure 3-3).

Figure 3-3 Remove Chassis.

4. Lift the chassis approximately halfway out.

IMPORTANT: You must disconnect the ribbon cable before completely removing the
chassis.
5. Remove the ribbon cable connector from the main board using pliers or a flat blade screw-
driver (Figure 3-4).

Front Cover
Flexible Circuit

Figure 3-4 Remove Ribbon Cable Connector.

6. Pull the chassis out and away from the housing as shown by the arrow (Figure 3-4) and
beware of the front cover flexible circuit.
7. Remove the flexible circuit using a pair of tweezers or manually unlatching the ZIF connector
(Figure 3-5).

3-2 Maintenance
 How to Disassemble the Radio

Figure 3-5 Unlatching Zif Connector.

2.3 Remove the Main Board

The front shield holds the main board into the chassis. To remove the front shield:

1. Place radio, shield side down, on a flat surface.

2. Apply downward pressure to chassis directly above one of the clips opposite PTT switch.
3. With a flat blade screwdriver, carefully move clip away from tab on chassis to release.
Note: Remove both clips opposite the PTT switch first, to ease remaining clip removal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the remaining three clips.
5. Separate the main board from the chassis (Figure 3-6).

Chassis

Gasket

Main board

Locking clips

Figure 3-6 Separate Main Board From Chassis.

Maintenance 3-3
How to Disassemble the Radio

6. Separate the flexible circuit tail by undoing the ZIF connector latch (Figure 3-7).
.

Figure 3-7 Remove Separate Flexible Circuit Tail.

2.4 Remove the Front Housing Board

1. Place the front housing assembly with the front facing down on a padded flat surface. This is
to avoid the lens from being scratched.
2. Remove the front housing shield using tweezers or sharp end screwdriver by undoing the
four side catches (Figure 3-8)
.

Figure 3-8 Removing Front Housing Shield.

Note: Undo the two opposite catches at the same time.

3. Separate the front housing board from the front housing.

3-4 Maintenance
 How to Reassemble the Radio

3.0 How to Reassemble the Radio

1. Place chassis on a flat surface with the battery rails downward.
2. Insert the flexible circuit tail into the ZIF connector and lock the connector by engaging the
latch (Figure 3-9).

Figure 3-9 Align Pins.

3. Insert main board into chassis using alignment pins as a guide (Figure 3-9).
4. Place front shield on main board using tabs as a guide (Figure 3-9).
5. Press down on front shield until chassis, main board, and front shield are seated tightly
together.
6. Hook locking clips first to the chassis tab, then push clips over on shield with thumb until clips
lock into front shield holes (Figure 3-10).

Figure 3-10 Reinsert Locking Clips.

7. Replace chassis gasket (Figure 3-11).

8. Place the chassis assembly and front housing assembly on a flat surface with frequency con-
trol and volume control and top face of housing in opposite direction.

Maintenance 3-5
How to Reassemble the Radio

9. Insert the flexible circuit tail from chassis to ZIF connector on front housing board. Lock the
tail in the ZIF connector by pressing down the latch.

Note: Flexible circuit tail must be fully inserted to prevent short circuit.

Note: The gasket helps keep the radio free from unwanted dirt, dust, and water. We recommend
using a new lubricated gasket when reassembling the radio. Using an old gasket could
impair the overall seal quality of the radio.

Figure 3-11 Replace Gasket.

10. Insert assembled chassis, main board, and front shield into radio housing at approximately a
45-degree angle (Figure 3-12) using caution while inserting the volume and frequency con-
trols through the housing top.

IMPORTANT: The main board must be inserted into chassis (Step 2) before you can
secure chassis into radio housing.
11. Connect microphone/speaker ribbon cable (Figure 3-12).
12. While pressing chassis toward the housing top, press the bottom end down into the housing
until the bottom housing wall snaps over the chassis retaining studs.

Figure 3-12 Insert Chassis into Housing.

Note: The chassis should snap firmly into place.

13. Replace the battery, knobs and antenna.

3-6 Maintenance
 How to Reassemble the Radio

3.1 Reassemble the Front Housing Assembly

1. Place the front housing on a cushioned flat surface with the front facing down.
2. Place the keypad into the front housing (Figure 3-13).

Figure 3-13 Place Keypad into Front Housing.

3. Place the board on the keypad in the housing (Figure 3-13).

4. Place the front housing shield into the front housing using the four slots on the front housing
wall as the guide (Figure 3-14).

Figure 3-14 Place Front Housing Shield Into Front Housing.

5. Press down the shield at the four tabs until tabs lock into the front housing catches.

Maintenance 3-7
How to Reassemble the Radio

6. Fold the LCD flexible circuit (Figure 3-15).

7. Slot in the lightpipe (Figure 3-15).

Figure 3-15 Slot in the Lightpipe.

3-8 Maintenance
 Mechanical Exploded View Diagram

4.0 Mechanical Exploded View Diagram

40
22

21

23

10 12
20

19
11 29
31 27
8 28
18 7 30
13 43
14 15
16
39

17 9 33

42 35 34
41

32

2
36
38
37

4 3
1
26
5 25
24

Table 3-1 Mechanical Parts List.

REFERENCE MOTOROLA REFERENCE MOTOROLA

DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
SYMBOL PART NO. SYMBOL PART NO.
1 15-04618J01 Housing, Front 22 HLN9724 Clip, Belt
2 33-04623J02 Nameplate 23 -------- Battery, (see accessories)
3 41-05944K01 Spring, Coil; 2 used 24 26-80193R01 Shield, Front
4 61-04622J01 Lens, LCD 25 42-80190R04 Clip, Locking; 4 used
5 84-04627J01 Flex, Interconnect 26 33-80446B01 Label, Patent
6 55-80438B01 Latch, Battery 27 01-80702Y88 Chassis
7 35-80998Z04 Felt, Speaker 28 32-80545C01 Gasket, Chassis
8 14-80577C01 Boot, Microphone 29 33-80184R01 Label, FCC
9 30-80560D01 Cable, Speaker/Microphone 30 33-80408B01 Label, Reseller
10 50-05589U04 Speaker 31 42-80126S01 Clip, P.A.
11 50-01392A03 Microphone 32 33-80445B01 Label, Tamper
12 75-80506C02 Pad, Speaker 33 -------- P.A. Module
13 75-04805J02 Keypad, PTT (see schematic parts list)
14 13-80159S01 Bezel, PTT 34 -------- Receiver Module
15 38-80428C01 Dust Cap (see schematic parts list)
16 32-80960Y01 Seal; 2 used 35 03-00136783 Screw
17 61-80968Y01 Lightpipe 36 -------- RF Board (see model charts)
18 13-80507B04 Escutcheon, 16-channel 37 75-04620J01 Keypad
19 36-04641J01 Knob, Volume 38 84-04599J01 Board, Controller
20 36-04642J02 Knob, Frequency 39 26-04619J01 Shield, Controller
21 -------- Antenna (see accessories) 40 39-80188R01 Contact, Batter B+/B-; 2 used

Maintenance 3-9
Service Aids

5.0 Service Aids

The following table lists service aids recommended for working on the GP600 radio.

Table 3-2 Service Aids.

Motorola
Description Application
Part No.
HLN9214 Radio Interface Box Enables communication between the radio and the compu-
ter’s serial communications adapter.
HSN9412 RIB Power supply Used to supply power to the RIB.
HKN9216 Computer Interface cable Connects the computer’s serial communications adapter to
the RIB.
HLN9390 AT to XT Computer adapter Allows HKN9216 to plug into a XT style communications
port.
HKN9857 Programming / test cable Connects radio to RIB. And can be used as a
Battery Eliminator.
HKN9755 Cloning Cable Allows the radio to be duplicated from a master radio by
transferring programmed data from one radio to another.
RTX4005 Portable Test Set Enables connection to the audio / accessory jack. Allows
switching for radio testing.
RKN4034 Test Set cable Connects radio to RTX4005 Test Box.

6.0 Test Set Service Cable

P1
6
3.5 mm plug 12
NOTE: Pins 2 and 7 14 Speaker (Hi)
are cut. tip
47 ohm, 1/2w
9 Speaker (Lo)
5 sleeve 11
4 6
12 2
7 3 Gnd
3 14 sleeve + 1.0 uF
4 Mic. Audio
11 8
2 tip 5 PTT
1 9 2.5 mm plug 33k, 1/8 w 1
7
(P1) DETAIL 8
FRONT SIDE
NOTE: For proper speaker impedance, the RTX4005
test set Audio out switch must be set to the “MX” position

Figure 3-16 Service Cable (RKN4034) for the Test Set (RTX4005).

3-10 Maintenance
 Test Equipment

7.0 Test Equipment

The following table lists test equipment required to service the GP600 radio and other two-way
radios.

Table 3-3 Recommended Test Equipment.

Motorola
Description Characteristics Application
Model No.
R2200, R2400, Service Monitor This monitor will substi- Frequency/deviation meter and
or R2001D with tute for items with an signal generator for wide-range
trunking option asterisk * troubleshooting and alignment
*R1049A Digital Multimeter Two meters recommended for ac/
dc voltage and current
measurements
*S1100A Audio Oscillator 67 to 161.4Hz tones Used with service monitor for
injection of PL tones
*S1053D, AC Voltmeter, Power 1mV to 300V, 10Mohm Audio voltage measurements
*SKN6009A, Cable for meter, Test input impedance
*SKN6001A leads for meter
R1053 Dual-trace 20 Mhz bandwidth, Waveform measurements
Oscilloscope 5mV/cm - 20V/cm
*S1350C, Wattmeter, Plug-in 50-ohm, + 5% accuracy Transmitter power output
*ST1223B (UHF), Elements (UHF), RF 10 Watts, maximum measurements
*T1013A Dummy Load 0-1000 Mhz, 300W
S1339A RF Millivolt Meter 100uV to 3V rf, 10 khz RF level measurements
to 1.2 Ghz
*R1013A SINAD Meter Receiver sensitivity
S1347D or DC Power Supply 0-20 Vdc, 0-5 Amps Bench supply for 10Vdc
S1348D ( prog )

Maintenance 3-11
Test Equipment

3-12 Maintenance
 Table of Contents

Chapter 4
Troubleshooting Charts
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview..................................................................................................... 1

2.0 Troubleshooting Charts ............................................................................ 1

Figure
4-1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Receiver............................................................................. 2
4-2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Transmitter......................................................................... 2
4-3 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Synthesiser ........................................................................ 2
4-4 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Microprocessor .................................................................. 2
4-5 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) .................................. 2

Troubleshooting Charts 4-i

Table of Contents

4-ii Troubleshooting Charts

 Overview

1.0 Overview
4

This section contains troubleshooting charts for the following radio components:

■ Receiver
■ Transmitter
■ Synthesiser
■ Microprocessor
■ Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO)

2.0 Troubleshooting Charts

Refer to following pages:

Troubleshooting Charts 4-1

Troubleshooting Charts

Start
1

Very low or no 12
Check IFIC
dB SINAD U51 (see Is 2nd LO on NO Are VDC of
freq? NO
below) pins 7,9, and
10 of IFIC
YES OK?
Noise at spkr NO YES
when radio is Noise at pin 23 NO
Check VDC of
unsqu’d? of IFIC U51? all IFIC pins
Check 2nd LO
XTAL and
YES YES components
Are YES
NO Check ASFIC voltages on
Is 1st LO at Check pins OK? Check IFIC
T2 3dBM? VCO/Synth (see below)

NO
YES Check external
Check external components
Inject on channel components connected to IFIC
signal at RF port connected to IFIC. If
of T1 OK, replace U51

YES Inject on Channel

Is 12 dB SINAD Signal at Pin 1 of
-112 dBm? Front End Module
U1

YES NO
NO Is 12 dBS -117
dBm?
Inject Signal at
IF Port of T1 Check
at 45.1 MHz harmonic
filter and
antenna path NO
4.1VDC at
Pin 3 of U1
Is YES
12 dBS Check mixer
-120dBm? components YES

Bad Front Check 5R

NO and Q405
End Module
Inject a 45.1
MHz signal at
C59 Is Q51 biased NO
correctly?
Check 5R
YES YES and IF amp
Is 12 dBS -112 components
dBm? Check Xtal
filters Y51A
& Y51B
NO
1

Figure 4-1 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Receiver.

4-2 Troubleshooting Charts

 Troubleshooting Charts

Start

No
Power

Is the Inspect:
NO 1)Controller flex
LED’s red light
on or not? 2)Voltage Regulator

YES

NO NO
Is Tx B+ Is Biasing of Replace
OK? Q154 OK? Q154

YES YES

YES Is NO Is Control LOW Troubleshoot

current Voltage High Power Control
OK? or Low? Circuit

NO Is
Replace PA Power Out of HIGH
Module Pin 6 at PA
OK
NO
Is PA Drive Troubleshoot
YES OK? VCO

1.Check Pin Diodes

2. Check Harmonic Filter YES

Replace PA
Module
Inspect/Repair
TX Output
Network

Is YES
Power Done
OK?

NO

Replace PA
Module

Figure 4-2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Transmitter.

Troubleshooting Charts 4-3

Troubleshooting Charts

Start

Visual
Correct NO
check of the
Problem Board OK?
Check 5V
YES Regulator

NO Is U201 Pin 32
AT = 13 VDC

+5V at U201 NO
Pin’s Is 16.8MHz NO Check
YES 12,22,23 Signal at Y201,C205,C206,R20
Check C202, &3 U201 Pin 14? 7 and CR203
C203, CR201 Fix YES
CR202 and C204 Connection YES

Are signals NO
Is U201 Pin 1 NO
at Pin’s 9 & Are Waveforms NO
<0.7 VDC in RX &
10 of U201? at Pins 9 & 10
>4.3 VDC in TX?
triangular?
YES
YES
Is Connection NO
between Pin 10 NO Do Pins 5,6 & 7
& of U201 toggle
Pin 1 OK? when channel is
NO
Is U201 Pin 18 changed?
NO Is there a short
AT4.65 VDC?
between Pin 32 and
YES Pins 9 & 10 of Check programming
U201? lines between U401
and U201 Pins 5,6 & 7 YES
Replace U201
YES YES

Remove
Shorts
NO
Is information
If line between
from µP U401
Pin 16 &3 of correct?
U257 OK then
Is RF level at NO
replace U201
Pin 20 Check µP U401
between -10 & Troubleshooting
Chart YES
+5 dBm?

Replace U201
If L203,C224,C226 & C227
YES and runners between
U201 Pin 20 & U251 Pin 23
are OK, then see VCO
troubleshooting chart

Replace or Are R201,R202,

resolder NO
R205,C214,C215,
necessary C216 & L201 OK?
components
Is conn between NO Fix
Pin 29 of U201
connection
and CR202/
203 OK?

YES
Replace U201

Figure 4-3 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Synthesiser.

4-4 Troubleshooting Charts

 Troubleshooting Charts

START

Apply power to radio and

turn on

Are NO Was good or

NO/DON’T alert tones
enabled with bad power-on
KNOW beep present?
RSS?

YES
YES

Reprogram radio
Use RSS to Enable Tones with RSS. Apply
NO
Was good power-on beep power to radio and
present? turn on.
Are
YES Alert Tones
Enabled with YES
RSS?
DONE
NO

NO Was good
Check Radio power-on
Connection to Rib beep present
and Computer ?

YES

DONE
Main radio board must
be replaced
NO RIB/Radio
Connections
OK?

YES DONE

NO
With power connected to radio and the radio turned
on check the following: Are
tones present
on power up at
1) 5V at pin 4 of U704 and pin 71,12,31,41 of U709. U701 pin 66?
2) Check for 7.9488 MHz at pin 73 OF U709.
3) Check DC at pin 75 of U709. If < 4.5VDC check
U701 pin 38 for 2.1 MHz signal. YES
4) Check for typical voltages of U709 and U701.
Audio problem. Trouble-
shoot audio circuitry DONE

Figure 4-4 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Microprocessor.

Troubleshooting Charts 4-5

Troubleshooting Charts

RX VCO TX VCO
Low or no Power Low or no power Power OK but no
at T2 of Mixer at U101 Pin 1 Modulation

NO Correct NO Visual check

VisualCheck 151 mVrms NO
of Board OK? Problem of Board OK? Replace
at “+” Side C217
of C217?
YES YES
YES
If runners between U201
NO Pin 18 and U251 Pin 13 are NO 4.56 VDC at
4.56 VDC at
U251 Pin 13? OK, then replace L253 or U251 Pin 13? NO Replace
4.65 VDC R253
L262 at CR255? or L260

YES YES

YES
0.7 VDC at NO Check runner NO 4.3 VDC at
U251 Pin 5? between U201 Pin 1 U251 Pin 5? If C284 and R254
and U251 Pin 5
are OK, then
replace CR255
YES
YES

0.01 VDC at NO Replace NO

0.01 VDC at
U251 Pin 9? L257 U251 Pin 17?

YES Replace
YES L252

Are If all parts Are

U251 Pin’s associated U251 Pin’s
7 at 2.1VDC, NO with those Pin’s 19 at 2.1VDC,
10 at 0.8VDC, are OK, 16 at 0.9VDC,
11 at 1.2VDC, then replace 15 at 1.7VDC,
12 at 1.2 U251 14 at 1.4
VDC? VDC?

YES

4.2 VDC at Replace Replace

3.9 VDC at L259,L260 or
U251 Pin 2? L260 or R258 U251 Pin 4? R258

YES
YES
If all parts from U251 Pin 2 to
If all parts from U251 Pin 4 to
T2 of mixer are OK, then
U101 Pin 1 OK, then replace
replace U251
U251

Figure 4-5 Troubleshooting Flow Chart for Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO).

4-6 Troubleshooting Charts

 Table of Contents

Chapter 5
Accessories
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 GP600 Accessories ....................................................................................1
1.1 Antennas.......................................................................................................1
1.2 Carrying Accessories....................................................................................1
1.3 Nickel-Cadmium Battery Chargers ...............................................................1
1.4 Batteries........................................................................................................1
1.5 Audio/RF Accessories ..................................................................................1

Accessories 5-i
Table of Contents

5-ii Accessories
 GP600 Accessories

1.0 GP600 Accessories

5

This chapter lists the accessories for the GP600 portable radio.

1.1 Antennas

PMAE4002_ UHF 9cm Antenna 403-433MHz stubby

NAE6483_ UHF Whip Antenna 403-470MHz
NAD6502_ VHF Antenna 146-174MHz

1.2 Carrying Accessories

HLN8052_ Wrist Strap
HLN8255_ Spring Action 3” Belt Clip
HLN9724_ Replacement 2 1/2” Belt Clip
HLN9985_ Waterproof Bag

1.3 Nickel-Cadmium Battery Chargers

HTN9630_ 110 Volt - 1 Hour Rapid Rate Charger
HTN9702_ 110 Volt - 10 Hour Standard Rate Charger
HTN9748_ 110 Volt - 6 Unit - 1 Hour Rapid Rate Charger
ETN4613_ 220 Volt - 1 Hour Rapid Rate Charger (European Plug)
HTN9804_ 220 Volt - 10 Hour Standard Rate Charger (European Plug)
HTN9811_ 220 Volt - 2 Unit - 1 Hour Rapid Rate Charger (European Plug)
ETN4612_ 240 Volt - 1 Hour Rapid Rate Charger (U.K. Plug)
HTN9805_ 240 Volt - 10 Hour Standard Rate Charger (U.K. Plug)
HTN9812_ 240 Volt - 6 Unit - 1 Hour Rapid Rate Charger (U.K. Plug)
HLN9719_ 1 Hour Vehicular Charger Adapter/Bracket (12 volt for use with HTN9630,
HTN9802, or HTN9803 Rapid Rate Chargers)
HLN9944_ Wall Mounting Bracket For Multi Unit Charger
HKN8036_ Battery Eliminator

1.4 Batteries
HNN9628_ 1200 mAH High Capacity Battery
HNN8308_ 600 mAH Slimline Battery

1.5 Audio/RF Accessories

HMN9725_ Remote Speaker Microphone
HMN9727_ Earpiece Without Volume Control (plastic earloop)
HMN9752_ Earpiece With Volume Control (plastic earloop)
50-80386B90 Rubber Ear Inserts for Earpieces (with older metal earloop - pkg q. 25)
50-80371E73 Rubber Ear Inserts for Earpieces (with plastic earloop - pkg q. 25)
HMN9754_ 2 Piece Surveillance Microphone (plastic earloop)
BDN6706_ Ear Microphone w/VOX Interface (External VOX Included)
BDN6720_ Flexible Ear Receiver-Earpiece without volume control.
HLN8096_ Audio Accessory Clamp
HLN9756_ BNC - RF Adapter (for use with GP600 models only)

Accessories 5-1
5-2 Accessories
 Table of Contents

Chapter 6
Band Specific Information

Chapter Page
6A UHF (403-433MHz) ............................................................................. 6A.1-i

6B VHF (146-174MHz) .............................................................................. 6B.1-i

6C UHF (438-470MHz) ............................................................................. 6C.1-i

Band Specific Information 6-i

Table of Contents

6-ii Band Specific Information

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6A
403-433MHz Specific Information
Table of Contents

Chapter
6A.1 Model Chart and Test Specifications

6A.2 Radio Tuning Procedure

6A.3 Theory of Operation

6A.4 PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists

403-433MHz Specific Information 6A-i

Table of Contents

6A-ii 403-433MHz Specific Information

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6A.1
Model Chart and Test Specifications
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview......................................................................................................1

2.0 UHF Model Chart.........................................................................................1

3.0 UHF Technical Specification ..................................................................... 2

3.1 General ........................................................................................................ 2
3.2 Receiver....................................................................................................... 2
3.3 Transmitter................................................................................................... 2
3.4 Battery Life....................................................................................................2

Model Chart and Test Specifications 6A.1-i

Table of Contents

6A.1-ii Model Chart and Test Specifications

 Overview

1.0 Overview
6A.1

This chapter lists the UHF (403-433MHz) models and technical specifications for the GP600
portable radio.

2.0 UHF Model Chart GP600 403-433 MHz 12.5 kHz 4W MPT D
GP600 403-433 MHz 12.5 kHz 4W MPT

GP600
Description

UHF
403 - 433 MHz
X = Indicates one of each required
AZP94VJB05N1_E
AZP94VJA05N1_E
Model

Item Description
X X PMLE4022_ RF Board, 12.5 kHz, (403-433 MHz)
X PMLN4086_ GP600 Front Cover Display Kit
X PMLN4087_ GP600 Front Cover Non-Display Kit
X X HLN9667_ Chassis Hardware Assembly
X X NAE6483_ Whip Antenna (403-470 MHz)
X X HNN9628_ Battery
X X 6802908X01_ GP600 User Guide

Model Chart and Technical Specifications 6A.1-1

3.0 Technical Specification

3.1 General 3.3 Transmitter

Frequency Range UHF: 403-433 MHz Power Output 1-4W

(no degradation) ........... ...
Channel Spacing 12.5/25 kHz
Maximum Deviation
Modulation FM, 12.5kHz ± 2.5
Type 8K5G3, 25kHz ±5
14G3,16G3
Audio Distortion <3 %
Antenna Impedance 50 ohms (@1kHz, 60% deviation)

Mode of Operation Trunked/Conventional Spurious and Harmonics -36 dBm

Power Supply 1200 mAH Battery Switching Bandwidth 30 MHz

No degradation .......... ...
Operating Temperature -25 to +55°C

Storage Temperature -40 to +85°C

3.4 Battery Life
Environmental MIL-STD 810C/D/E

Frequency Stability 1200mAh Battery Capacity

12.5 kHz ppm ±1.00
25 kHz ppm ±1.35 Medium Ultra-High

UHF (5-5-90) 4 Watt* 8 hrs 8 hrs

3.2 Receiver *Typical Values

12.5kHz 20/25kHz

Sensitivity*
12dB SINAD (emf) µV 0.35µV 0.35µV
20dB SINAD (emf) µV 0.5µV 0.5µV Note: Self Quieting Frequencies
Audio Output Power
Self-quieting frequencies are frequencies
<5% distortion @1kHz 500 mW 500 mW
that are also generated by the radio and
with rated audio output
cause internal interference. On these
Spurious / Image 70 dB 70 dB frequencies the interference caused by the
Rejection self-quieter spur is great enough that a
radio will not meet its receiver sensitivity
Selectivity 60 dB 60 dB
specification.
Intermodulation 65 dB 65 dB
The frequencies are:
Switching Bandwidth 30 MHz 403.2, 411.6, 420.0 and 431.55MHz
No degradation ....... ..... .

6A.1-2 Model Chart and Technical Specifications

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6A.2
Radio Tuning Procedure
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 GP600 Radio Tuning .................................................................................. 1
1.1 General ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Transmitter Power ....................................................................................... 2
1.3 Reference Oscillator .................................................................................... 3
1.4 Rated Volume .............................................................................................. 3
1.5 Squelch Attenuation..................................................................................... 4
1.6 Transmit Deviation Balance (Compensation) .............................................. 4
1.7 Transmit Deviation Limit .............................................................................. 5
1.8 RSSI ............................................................................................................ 5
1.9 MPT1327 Transmit Deviation / DTMF Transmit Deviation .......................... 6

Radio Tuning Procedure 6A.2-i

Table of Contents

6A.2-ii Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.0 GP600 Radio Tuning

6A.2

1.1 General

The recommended hardware platform is a 386 or 486 DX 33 PC (personal computer) with 8 Mbytes
RAM, MsDOS 3.3, Windows 3.1 or later, and DPS (Dealer Programming Software). These are
required to align the radio. Refer to the DPS Installation Manual (section 2 of the Product Manual) for
installation and setup procedures for the required software; the user manual is accessed (and can
be printed if required) via the DPS.

To perform the alignment procedures, the radio must be connected to the PC, RIB (Radio Interface
Box), and Universal Test Set as shown in figure 2-1.
SERVICE MONITOR
30 dB PAD OR COUNTER
TRANSMIT

30 dB PAD WATTMETER

BNC
RF GENERATOR
SMA-BNC RECEIVE
58-80348B33

SET TO APPROX. 450mV FOR TX

AUDIO IN TX
BATTERY TEST SET AUDIO GENERATOR
ELIMINATOR RTX-4005B
RLN-1014A RX
SINAD METER
RADIO TEST CABLE
RKN4034
AC VOLTMETER

MEASURE 80mV FOR TX

PROGRAM/TEST CABLE
HKN9857

COMPUTER

RIB DATA
HLN9214 BUSY
GND

COMPUTER INTERFACE CABLE

HKN9216

RIB POWER SUPPLY

HSN9412 (110 VAC.)/
0180358A56 (220 VAC.)

Figure 2-1 Radio Alignment Test Setup.

All tuning procedures are performed from the Service menu.

Before going into the Service menu, the radio must first be read using the File / Read Radio menu (if
the radio has just been programmed with data loaded from disk or from a newly created codeplug,
then it must still be read so that the DPS will have the radio’s actual tuning values).

All Service windows read and program the radio codeplug directly; you do NOT have to use the DPS
Read Radio / Write Radio functions to program new tuning values.

CAUTION: DO NOT switch radios in the middle of any Service procedure. Always use
the Program or Cancel key to close the tuning window before disconnect-
ing the radio. Improper exits from the Service window may leave the radio
in an improperly configured state and result in seriously degraded radio or
system performance.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6A.2-1

GP600 Radio Tuning

The Service windows introduce the concept of the “Softpot”, an analog SOFTware controlled
POTentiometer used for adjusting all transceiver alignment controls. A softpot can be selected by
clicking with the mouse at the value or the slider or by hitting the TAB key until the value or the slider
is highlighted.

Each Service window provides the capability to increase or decrease the ‘softpot’ value with the
mouse, the arrow keys or by entering a value with the keyboard. The window displays the minimum,
maximum, and step value of the softpot. In addition transmitter tuning windows indicate the
transmitter frequency and whether the radio is keyed.

Adjusting the softpot value sends information to the radio to increase (or decrease) a DC voltage in
the corresponding circuit. For example, increasing the value in the Reference Oscillator tune window
instructs the radio microprocessor to increases the voltage across a varactor in the reference
oscillator to increase the frequency. Pressing the Program button stores all the softpot values of the
current window permanently in the radio.

In ALL cases, the softpot value is just a relative number corresponding to a D/A (Digital-to-Analog)
generated voltage in the radio. All standard measurement procedures and test equipment are
similar to previous radios.

Refer to the DPS on-line help for information on the tuning software. Perform the following
procedures in the sequence indicated.

Note: All tuning procedures must be performed at a supply voltage of 7.5V unless
otherwise stated.

1.2 Transmitter Power

The radio requires two power level settings, a high power level setting, and a low power level setting.
To set the transmitter power, either to high or low setting, follow the procedures below:

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Transmit Low Power for low power tuning and select Transmit High Power for high power
tuning. In each case, the window will indicate 7 transmitter test frequencies for fine tune and
one for coarse tune.
3. Select the first test frequency of fine tune.
4. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
5. Measure the transmitter power on your power meter.
6. Vary the value of the selected slider (or by entering value in the box) until you get the desired
power.
7. Once you get the desired power, press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
8. Repeat steps 4-7 for all test frequencies shown in the window.
9. Press Program to store the softport values.

6A.2-2 Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.3 Reference Oscillator

Adjustment of the reference oscillator is critical for proper radio operation. Improper adjustment will
not only result in poor operation, but also a misaligned radio that will interfere with other users
operating on the adjacent channels. For this reason, the reference oscillator should be checked
every time the radio is serviced. The frequency counter used for this procedure must have a stability
of 0.1 ppm (or better).

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Reference Oscillator to open the reference oscillator tuning window.
3. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
4. Measure the transmit frequency on your frequency counter.
5. Adjust the reference oscillator per the targets shown in table 2-1.
6. Press Toggle PTT again to dekey the radio and then press Program to store the softpot value..

Table 2-1 Reference Oscillator Alignment

RF-Band Target

UHF ±150 Hz

1.4 Rated Volume

The rated volume softpot sets the volume at normal test modulation.

1. Use test box (RTX4005) and set SW1 switch to speaker. Connect an AC voltmeter to the test
box meter port.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select Rated Volume to open the rated volume tuning window. The screen will indicate the
receive test frequency to be used.
4. Set the RF test generator to the receive test frequency and apply -47 dBm RF carrier frequency
with a 1 kHz tone at 60 % rated deviation. The 1 kHz tone must be audible to make sure the
radio is receiving.
5. Adjust the value of the obtained rated audio volume ( as close as 2.7 Vrms)
6. Press Program to store the softpot value.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6A.2-3

GP600 Radio Tuning

1.5 Squelch Attenuation

The squelch softpots set the signal to noise ratio at which the squelch opens. The squelch value
needs to be set at 7 frequencies across the frequency range.

1. Use test box (RTX4005), connect a SINAD meter to the “METER” port.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select Squelch Attenuation to open the squelch attenuation tuning window. The window will
indicate the receive test frequencies to be used.
4. Select the first test frequency shown, and set the corresponding value to 0.
5. Set the RF test generator to the test frequency, offset it with +500 Hz, and modulate it at 60 %
deviation with 1 kHz tone. Adjust the generator for a 18 dB SINAD level (weighted with
psophometric filter).
6. Adjust the softpot value until the squelch just closes.
7. Monitor for squelch chatter; if chatter is present, repeat step 6.
8. When no chatter is detected, select the next softpot and repeat steps 5 -7 for all test
frequencies shown in the window.
9. Press Program to store the softpot values.

1.6 Transmit Deviation Balance (Compensation)

Compensation alignment balances the modulation sensitivity of the VCO and reference modulation
(synthesizer low frequency port) lines. Compensation algorithm is critical to the operation of
signalling schemes that have very low frequency components (e.g. DPL) and could result in
distorted waveforms if improperly adjusted. The compensation value needs to be set at 7
frequencies across the frequency range.

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Modulation Attenuation to open the deviation balance tuning window. The window will
indicate the transmit test frequencies to be used.
3. Use the Test Box (RTX4005) and inject a 80 Hz tone at 100 mVrms into the “Audio In” port.
Connect an AC meter to the meter port to insure the proper input signal level.
4. Select the first test frequency shown in the window.
5. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
6. Measure the transmitter deviation.
7. Change the input tone to 3 kHz, 100 mVrms.
8. Measure again the transmitter deviation.
9. Adjust this deviation to within +/- 2 % of the value recorded earlier in step 6.
10. Check the deviation at 80 Hz again and repeat step 7, if it has changed since step 6.
11. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
12. Repeat steps 3-10 for the remaining test frequencies.
13. Press Program to store the softpot values.

Note: The step size change for step 8 is approximately 2.5% softpot value.

6A.2-4 Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.7 Transmit Deviation Limit

The transmit deviation limit softpot sets the maximum deviation of the carrier. The deviation value
needs to be set at 7 frequencies across the frequency range.

1. From the Service menu, Select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Reference Attenuation to open the reference attenuation tuning window.
3. Set the maximum value and press Program to store the softpot value.
4. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.
5. Select VCO Attenuation to open the deviation limit tuning window. The window will indicate the
transmit test frequencies to be used.
6. Use Test Box (RTX4005) and inject a 1 kHz tone at 80 mVrms into the “Audio In” port. Connect
an AC meter to the meter port to insure the proper input signal level.
7. Select the first test frequency shown in the window.
8. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
9. Adjust the transmitter deviation to the value shown in table 2-2.
10. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
11. Repeat steps 8 - 10 for the remaining test frequencies.
12. Press Program to store the softpot values.

Table 2-2 Transmitter Deviation

Channel Spacing Deviation

12.5 kHz 2.2-2.3 kHz

25 kHz 4.3-4.6 kHz

1.8 RSSI
1. Use test box (RTX4005) and set the SW1 switch to SPEAKER.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select RSSI to open the RSSI tuning window. The screen will indicate the receive test
frequency to be used.
4. Set the RF test generator to the receive test frequency, and set the RF level to the value
indicated for RSSI Level 0, modulated with 1 kHz tone at 60 % deviation. The 1 kHz tone must
be audible to make sure the radio is receiving.
5. Press Program to store the softpot value for RSSI Level 0.
6. Repeat steps 4 - 5 for the remaining RSSI levels.
7. Press Cancel to close the window.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6A.2-5

GP600 Radio Tuning

1.9 MPT1327 Transmit Deviation / DTMF Transmit Deviation

The MPT1327 Deviation Softpot is used to tune the FFSK signalling deviation. Tuning is performed
at one frequency. The radio generates an alternating bit pattern for tuning. Values for others
frequencies are calculated by the radio software.

The DTMF Deviation Softpot is used to tune the DTMF signalling deviation. Tuning is performed at
one frequency. The radio generates a DTMF signal for tuning. Values for other frequencies are
calculated by the radio software.

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Signalling Deviation to open the signalling deviation tuning window.
3. Select the MPT value and press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that
the radio is transmitting.
4. Adjust the transmitter deviation to the value shown in table 2-3.
5. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for DTMF deviation.
7. Press Program to store the softpot value.

Table 2-3 Signalling Deviation

Channel Spacing MPT 1327 Deviation

12.5 kHz 1.4-1.6 kHz 1.5-1.8 kHz

25 kHz 2.8-3.2 kHz 3.0-3.4 kHz

6A.2-6 Radio Tuning Procedure

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6A.3
Theory of Operation
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview..................................................................................................... 1

2.0 RF Section .................................................................................................. 1

2.1 Receiver....................................................................................................... 1
2.2 Transmitter................................................................................................... 3

3.0 Frequency Generation Circuitry ............................................................... 5

3.1 Synthesizer .................................................................................................. 5
3.2 VCO ............................................................................................................. 6

4.0 Controller.................................................................................................... 8
4.1 Functions ..................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Normal Operation ........................................................................................ 9
4.3 Clock Synthesizer ........................................................................................ 9
4.4 Bus Operation.............................................................................................. 9
4.5 RAM............................................................................................................. 9
4.6 EEPROM ................................................................................................... 10
4.7 SPI Interface .............................................................................................. 10
4.8 LED Control ............................................................................................... 10
4.9 Audio & Data Circuitry ............................................................................... 10
4.10 External PTT Sense Circuits...................................................................... 11
4.11 MIC Amplifier ............................................................................................. 11
4.12 TX Data Circuits......................................................................................... 11
4.13 Sub-Audible Data (PL/DPL)....................................................................... 11
4.14 High-Speed Data ....................................................................................... 12
4.15 DTMF Data ................................................................................................ 12
4.16 MDC Data .................................................................................................. 12
4.17 RX Audio Processing and Digital Volume Control ..................................... 12

Theory of Operation 6A.3-i

Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
4.18 Audio Power Amplifier ............................................................................... 13
4.19 Audio PA Muting and Output Protection .................................................... 13
4.20 Receive Data Circuits ................................................................................ 13
4.21 Alert Tone Circuits ..................................................................................... 13

Figure
3-1 RF Block Diagram.................................................................................................................1
3-2 Receiver Block Diagram .......................................................................................................2
3-3 Transmitter Block Diagram ...................................................................................................4
3-4 Synthesizer Block Diagram...................................................................................................5
3-5 VCO Block Diagram..............................................................................................................6
3-6 Controller Block Diagram......................................................................................................8

6A.3-ii Theory of Operation

 Overview

1.0 Overview
6A.3

This section provides a detailed theory of operation for the GP600 and its components:the receiver,
the transmitter, the frequency generation circuitry, the controller and audio & data circuitry.

2.0 RF Section
A block diagram of the RF section is shown in figure 3-1. The Rf section of the radio is divided into
Receiver and Transmitter functions.

Antenna Mixer Sq. Atten. Out

Switch Rx. Audio
Receiver
H.Filter Front End IF IFIC Carrier Det.
Module Adapt

Ref. Oscillator

Rx. Lo

Tx. Lo FRACT_N
VCO Mod. In
RF SYNTHESISER 28
PA Pin
Conn.
Mod.
ATTN Lock Det.

Current
Sense
Vctrl Prescalar
2.1MHz
Vref Reset Spi bus
Power
Control DAC
Circuit

Tx. MIC
Spi bus Audio Int./Ext
to AMP Mic
Rx./Tx, LED Rx. Audio
in from ASFIC
Int./Ext. Audio Pa ASFIC
Speaker

From
5V
REG. Reg. 5V
Batt.

PA Enable from
ASFIC

Figure 3-1 RF Block Diagram.

2.1 Receiver

The receiver of the GP600 radios consists of 4 major blocks each: the front-end module, the double
balanced mixer, the 45.1 MHz IF and the back-end IF IC.

The GP600 front-end modules consist of three blocks of circuitry each: a pre-selector, RF amplifier
and a post-selector filter. These three items are located on a receiver module pc-board that stands
perpendicular to the main radio PCB.

Theory of Operation 6A.3-1

RF Section

This module is enclosed in a shield to prevent radiation into and out of the module. It also improved
the grounding of the module by soldering the module shield to the main RF Board. All filters on the
UHF modules are fixed tuned designs to eliminate the need for factory tuning and to provide wide-
band operation.

“5R” (5V)

1st RF 2nd
Bandpass Bandpass
Filter Amp Filter

Receiver Front-end Module Lo+6dBm

“5R” (5V)
Detected Audio

1st IF 2nd
Crystal Crystal IF IC
Filter Amp Filter

Figure 3-2 Receiver Block Diagram.

The shunt coupled resonator topology yields a more symmetrical frequency response to guard
against strong out of band signals that could produce IM products.

The pre-selector filter is a 4-pole, .01 dB Chebyshev bandpass design implemented in a shunt
coupled resonator topology. This topology maximizes the attenuation at the worst case image
frequency for UHF band which is 90.2 MHz below the filter passband. The 3 dB bandwidth is
approximately 52 MHz. The center of the band insertion loss is approximately 3.5 dB. The 4-pole
filter is designed to operate with a 50 ohm input termination, while the output termination is the input
impedance of the RF amplifier that follows it.

The RF amplifier, Q1, is a Motorola MMBR941 NPN device biased in a common emitter
configuration. The amp is stabilized by the shunt feedBack resistor R3, and has approximately 20 dB
of gain with a noise figure of about 2.5 dB. The amplifier draws 4.9 ma of current and is supplied by
the receiver 5 volt supply (indicated as “5R” on the schematics and block diagrams).

Terminating the RF amplifier is the post-selector filter. This filter is the same as the prefilter. The filter
is designed to be terminated with the amplifier output impedance on one side, and 50 ohm on the
other.

The net gain from the receiver module is about 12.5 dB in the center of the band and about 11.5 dB
at the band edges. The net center of the band noise figure is approximately 5.5 dB. This is sufficient
to achieve a typical center of the band sensitivity of 12 dBs.

The double balanced mixer is composed of the two baluns, T1 and T2, and the ring diode IC, CR2.
The mixer operates with an LO level of +6 dBm and the conversion loss is approximately 7.5 dB. The
double balanced type mixer provides excellent isolation between any two ports. And since a dBm
can operate over a large bandwidth, the same mixer can be used for UHF radios. The dBm also
provides excellent protection against receiver spurs due to non-linearizes, such as IM and Half-IF.
The received signal mixes down to the frequency of the first IF, 45.1 MHz, and enters the IF circuitry.

6A.3-2 Theory of Operation

 RF Section

2.1.1 Intermediate Frequency (IF)

The Intermediate Frequency (IF) section of the portable radio consists of several sections including,
the high IF, the second LO, the second IF, and the IF IC chip. The first LO signal and the RF signal
mix to the IF frequency of 45.1 MHz, and then enters the IF portion of the radio.

The signal first enters the high IF, passes through a crystal filter, is then amplified by the IF amp, and
then passed through another crystal filter. The first crystal filter provides selectivity, second image
protection, and intermodulation protection. The amplifier provides approximately 16 dB of gain to the
signal. The signal then passes through the second crystal filter which provides further selectivity and
second image protection. The high IF has an approximate 3 dB bandwidth of 7 kHz for 20/25 kHz
models and 4 kHz for 12.5kHz models.

The filtered and amplified IF signal then mixes with the second local oscillator at 44.645 MHz. The
second LO uses an amplifier internal to the IF IC, an external crystal and some external chip parts.
The oscillator presents an approximate level of -15 dBm to the second IF mixer, internal to the IF IC.

The output of the mixing of the IF signal and the second LO produces a signal at 455kHz (second
IF). This signal is then filtered by external ceramic filters and amplified. It is then passed back to the
IF IC, sent to a phase-lock detector, and demodulated. The resulting detected audio output is then
sent to the ASFIC to recover the audio.

The IF IC also controls the squelch characteristics of the radio. With a few external parts the squelch
tail, hysteresis, attack and delay were optimized for the radio. The ASFIC allows the radio’s squelch
opening to be electronically adjusted.

2.2 Transmitter

The GP600 transmitters contain five basic circuits: a power amplifier, an antenna switch, a harmonic
filter, an antenna matching network, and a power control. Refer to the block diagram and the
schematic for more information.

The power amplifier used for transmitters is the LD-MOS module. The LD-MOS is capable of
supplying an output power at 6.8W with an input signal of 2mW and a supply voltage of 7.3V. The
power out can be varied by changing the biasing voltage at the first stage.

The antenna switch circuit consists of two PIN diodes (CR101and CR102), a pi network (C119,
L112, and part of C112), and at least one current limiting resistor R102 for UHF. In the transmit
mode, TX B+ is applied to the circuit to bias the diodes “on”. The shunt diode (CR102) shorts out the
receiver port, and the pi network, which operates as a quarter wave transmission line, transforms
the low impedance of the shunt diode to a high impedance at the input of the harmonic filter. In the
receive mode, the diodes are both off, and hence, there exists a low attenuation path between the
antenna and receiver ports.

The harmonic filter consists of part of C112, and L107, C113, L108, C114, L109, and C115. The
design of the harmonic filter for UHF is that of a Zolotarev design. This particular design is similar to
that of a Chebyshev filter except for a large amplitude first ripple (near dc). This type of filter has the
advantage that it can give greater attenuation in the stop-band for a given ripple level.

Another feature of this type of filter is that the coils tend to be smaller than with a Chebyshev design.

To optimize the performance of the transmitter and receiver into an antenna, a network is used to
match the antenna’s impedance to the harmonic filter. For UHF the network is made up of L111.
Note that, in order to measure the power out of the transmitter, one must remove the antenna and
screw in its place a special BNC-to-Phono adapter.

Theory of Operation 6A.3-3

RF Section

PTT

0dBm Power Antenna Harmonic Antenna

Module Switch Filter Match
From *
VCO
Buffer
VC
To Receiver 50 ohms

Power µP Serial
Ip R101 Control *Note: Connection to 50 ohms
Bus
can only be made by removing
antenna and screwing in its
Sw B+ place special BNC-to-Phono
adapter (5880166s01).

Figure 3-3 Transmitter Block Diagram.

The power control circuit consists of the networks associated with U151, Q156, Q151, Q152, Q155,
and U152. The Op Amp U151A-1 and Q156, along with resistor R101, make up a current-to-voltage
amplifier whose gain is mainly dependent upon the ratio of R179 to R153. The current to the final
stage of the power module is supplied through R101 (0.1 Ohms), which provides a voltage
proportional to the current drain. This voltage is amplified and applied to the input of U151B. The
resistors at the input of U151A-1 (R151, R152, R154, and R155) keep the voltages at the inputs of
U151A-1 below its maximum allowable. These resistors are 1% tolerance parts to minimize the error
produced at the emitter of Q156 resulting from the voltage offset at the input of U151A-1.

The voltage at the other input of the summing amp, U151A-2, is supplied from two DACs contained
within U152. These DACs are controlled by the microprocessor, and provide the reference voltage
for the control loop. One of the DACs, that connected to Pin 9 of U152, provides a coarse tune
voltage, while the other provides a fine tune voltage.

Since the output of the DACs is not zero when they are set to their lowest level, resistor R169 is
provided to bias up the minus input of the summing amp to compensate for the bias resulting from
the DACs.

The error voltage at the input of U151A-2 produces a voltage at its output, which is in turn applied to
the series pass transistor, Q152, through its driver, Q151. The voltage at the collector of Q152 is
applied to the controlled stage of the power module, which for UHF is the module’s second stage.
The feedback from the collector of Q152 to the emitter of Q151 through R166 is provided to keep the
two stages stable. Likewise, the feedback from the collector of Q152 to the minus input of the
summing amp is to keep the whole control loop stable.

The purpose of Q155 and its associated circuitry is to keep the control voltage on the module below
7.0 Volts, which is the maximum allowed for the UHF module.

The purpose of R173 was originally that of providing compensation to the control loop for changes in
the supply voltage, TX B+. However, experimentation has shown that this compensation is not really
required. Also, thermistor, R170, was provided to enable the shut back of the PA in the event that it
would get too hot. This has also been shown to not be required

6A.3-4 Theory of Operation

 Frequency Generation Circuitry

3.0 Frequency Generation Circuitry

The frequency generation circuitry is composed of two main IC’s, the Fractional-N synthesizer
(U201) and the VCO/Buffer IC (U251). Designed in conjunction to maximize compatibility, the two
IC’s provide many of the functions which normally would require additional circuitry. The block
diagram illustrates the interconnect and support circuitry used in the design. Refer to the schematic
for reference designator.

The supply for the synthesizer is from Regulated 5 Volts which also serves the rest of the radio. The
synthesizer in turn generates a superfiltered 5 Volts (*actually 4.65 Volts) which powers U251.

In addition to the VCO, the synthesizer must interface with the logic and ASFIC circuitry.
Programming for the synthesizer is accomplished through the data, clock, and chip enable lines
(pins 1, 2, and 35) from the microprocessor, U709. A serial stream of 98 bits is sent whenever the
synthesizer is programmed. A 5 volt dc signal from pin 2 indicates to the microprocessor that the
synthesizer is locked while unlock is indicated by a low voltage on this pin. Transmit modulation from
the ASFIC is applied to pin 8 of U201. Internally the audio is digitized by the Fractional-N and
applied to the loop divider to provide the low-port modulation. The audio is also run through an
internal attenuator for modulation balancing purposes before being outputted at pin 28 to the VCO. A
2.1 MHz clock for the AFIC is generated by the Fractional-N and is routed to pin 9 where it is filtered
and attenuated from 2.5 Volts to approximately 2 Volts.

3.1 Synthesizer

The Fractional-N synthesizer uses a 16.8 MHz crystal (Y201) to provide the reference frequency for
the system. The other reference oscillator components external to the IC are C205, C206, R207,
and CR203. The 16.8 MHz signal is divided down signal from the VCO. The loop filter, comprised of
R201, R202, R205, C201, C214, C215, and C216, provides the necessary d.c. steering voltage for
the VCO as well as filtering of spurious signals from the phase detector.

Data (5) 5
(U201) 2 Lock Det (to µP U709)
Clock (6) 6 FRACTIONAL_N
SYNTHESISER 11 Mod out (to ASFIC U701)
Cex (7) 7
28 Mod out (to VCO modulation)
Mod In (8) 8
Reg 5V 12,19,22,23,3
lout
GND (4,21,13,30) 4,21,13,30 29 2-Pole
Prescalar In ladapt Loop Filter
20 31
Crystal 1
14
Crystal 2 AUX3 Steering line
Reference
15 TRB 5
Oscillator Voltage
cp bias 1 1
27 Controlled
Filtered 5V Oscillator
26 18
cp bias 2 (U251)
32
VCP 10 9 16 23 4 2
Rx injection
Voltage V-mult 1 Warp
Multiplier V-mult 2 Tx injection

Figure 3-4 Synthesizer Block Diagram.

Theory of Operation 6A.3-5

Frequency Generation Circuitry

For achieving fast locking of the synthesizer, an internal adapt charge pump provides higher current
capability at pin 31 than when in the normal steady-state mode. Both the normal and adapt charge
pumps receive their supply from the voltage multiplier which is made up of C202, C203, C204,
C231, CR201, and CR202. By combining two 5 Volt square waves which are 180 out-of-phase along
with Regulated 5 Volts, a supply of approximately 12.6 Volts is available at pin 32 for the charge
pumps. The current for the normal mode charge pumps is set by R203. The pre-scaler for the loop is
internal to U201 with the value determined by the frequency band of operation.

3.2 VCO

The VCO (U251) in conjunction with the Fractional-N synthesizer (U201) generates rf in both the
receive and the transmit modes of operation. The TRB line (U251 pin 5) determines which oscillator
and buffer will be enabled. A sample of the rf signal from the enabled oscillator is routed from U251
pin 23, through a low pass filter, to the pre-scaler input (U201 pin 20). After frequency comparison in
the synthesizer, a resultant CONTROL VOLTAGE is received at the VCO. This voltage is a DC
voltage between 3 and 10 volts when the PLL is locked on frequency.

Lo Rf
Injection Low 10,11 Rx
Pass 2 Rx Rx Tank
Filter Buffer Osc Control
Voltage
Tx Rf
Injection Low 4 Tx
Tx Tx 15,16
Pass Tank
Attenuator Filter Buffer Osc
Filter

Audio
Tx/Rx/BS 5 Tx VCO In
Prescalar Switching TRB Mod
Buffer Network

AUX 3 (U201 pin 1)

VC GND VCC
23 13 1,20 3
Filter 5V (U201 pin 18)

Low
Prescalar RF out Pass Pre-In (U201 pin 20)
Filter

Figure 3-5 VCO Block Diagram.

In the receive mode, U251 pin 5 is grounded. This activates the receive VCO by enabling the receive
oscillator and the receive buffer of U251. The rf signal at U251 pin 2 is run through a low pass filter.
The rf signal after the low pass filter is the LO RF INJECTION and it is applied to the first mixer at
T2.

6A.3-6 Theory of Operation

 Frequency Generation Circuitry

During the transmit condition, PTT depressed, five volts is applied to U251 pin 5. This activates the
transmit VCO by enabling the transmit oscillator and the transmit buffer of U251. The rf signal at
U251 pin 4 is run through a low pass filter and an attenuator to give the correct drive level to the
input of the PA module (U101 pin 1). This rf signal is the TX RF INJECTION. Also in transmit mode,
the audio signal to be frequency modulated onto the carrier is received by the transmit VCO
modulation circuitry at AUDIO IN.

When a high impedance is applied to U251 pin 5, the VCO is operating in BATTERY SAVER mode.
In this case, both the receive and transmit oscillators as well as the receive, transmit, and pre-scaler
buffer are turned off. In the Fractional-N, the battery saver mode places the A/D and the modulation
attenuator in the off state. This mode is used to reduce current drain on the radio.

Theory of Operation 6A.3-7

Controller

4.0 Controller
The GP600 controller is an open architecture which consists of:
■ U709, Motorola 68HC11K1 microprocessor
■ U701, Audio Signalling Filter Integrated Circuit, ASFIC
■ U703, 1Kbyte EEPROM
■ U705, 128/256Kbyte OTP/FLASH ROM
■ U706, 8/32Kbyte Static RAM
■ U707, LCD Display Driver and
■ U704, 5V Voltage Regulator

U709, U703, U705, U706 and U707 are powered by U704. U701 is powered from a 5V Regulator
(U708) on Radio Module. In addition to the external memory devices, U709 has 768 bytes of RAM
and 640 bytes of EEPROM.

Reset

Tx. Limiter Ref

Carrier Tx. Attn Display
Filter and
Detect Audio & Splatter Driver
Pre-emp
Adapt VCO
Tone Attn To
Rx. Gen Synth
Audio Mod.In

Rx. Filter
Σ
2.1 Vol
Micro- MHz & De-emp
28 Attn Rx.
processor
Pin Sq. Audio
Conn. Out LCD
Attn
In

Data, Address
7.9488 and Control
MHz Clk
Keypad
Lock EE-
Detect PROM

Low Batt.
Monitor ROM/ RAM
SPI Bus FLASH
Vol
Sense
LED
5V From
5V Reg. Batt.

Push Channel
Button Switch
Reset

Figure 3-6 Controller Block Diagram.

6A.3-8 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.1 Functions

The microprocessor has two basic functions: interfacing with the outside world and controlling the
internal workings of the radio. The microprocessor interfaces directly with the keypad, side buttons,
PTT, rotary switch, battery low indicator, EXT PTT and volume sense. The microprocessor
constantly monitors these inputs and interprets any changes into commands that control the rest of
the radio. Some control functions it performs include loading the synthesizer with the desired RF
frequency, turning the RF PA on or off, enabling and disabling audio and data paths and generating
tones. Operations and operating conditions within the radio are interpreted by the microprocessor
and fed back to the operator as visible (the display) or audible (alert tone) indications of current
status.

4.2 Normal Operation

The regulated 5V output from U704 powers the microprocessor (U709) and the rest of the digital IC
except ASFIC (U701). The microprocessor’s clock is generated by the ASFIC, which has a built-in
programmable clock synthesizer.

4.3 Clock Synthesizer

Upon power-up and assuming that the ASFIC receives a proper 2.1MHz input on U701-P38 (which
comes from the transceiver board), the ASFIC outputs a 7.9488MHz CMOS square wave (0-5Vpp
logic) on U701-P30, which connects to the EXTAL input of the microprocessor, U709-P73. The
microprocessor operates at 1/4 of this frequency, which in this case computes to 1.9872MHz. In
particular, the E clock output (U709-P72) will be a 50% duty cycle square wave at this frequency.

4.4 Bus Operation

The microprocessor operates in expanded memory mode and executes firmware contained in OTP/
FLASH ROM, U705. The microprocessor uses a non-multiplexed address data bus, consisting data
lines D0 through D7 and address lines A0-A17. In addition, the microprocessor has integrated chip-
select logic so that external memories can be accessed without the need for external address
decoder gates. These chip-select signals are provided by U709-P28 and P29.

When the controller board is functioning normally, microprocessor’s address and data lines should
be toggling at CMOS logic levels. Specifically, the logic-high levels should be between 4.8 and 5.0V,
and the logic-low levels should be between 0 and 0.2V.

4.5 RAM

The on-chip 768 byte static RAM from U709 provides some scratch-pad memory, with the bulk of it
coming from the external 8 or 32Kbyte SRAM, U706. External SRAM accesses are indicated by the
U709-P28. Normally SRAM is accessed less often than the OTP/FLASH ROM, U705; i.e. the
number of transitions per second on U705 chip select (pin 30) should be 5-15 times higher than
those on U706 pin 20.

Theory of Operation 6A.3-9

Controller

4.6 EEPROM

The radio codeplug storage is provided by U709 internal 640 byte EEPROM, with an additional 1K
byte of memory space provided by external EEPROM, U703. There are three basic types of
codeplug information: information on the trunked system on which the radio is authorized to operate;
information on the conventional system, which is either of the repeater or talk-around type on which
the radio is authorized to operate, and information on the configuration and tuning of the radio itself.
Tuning information is normally located in the internal EEPROM of U709.

4.7 SPI Interface

The microprocessor communicates to several ICs and modules through a dedicated on-chip serial-
peripheral-interface (SPI) port which consists of transmit data line MOSI (U709-P1), receive data
line MISO (U709-P80), and clock line SCK (U709-P2). In addition, each IC that can be accessed by
the microprocessor using the SPI has a read/write select line associated with it. The ICs or circuits
and their associated select lines are:
■ EEPROM (U703) with select line U709-P3
■ ASFIC (U701) with select line U709-P34
■ LCD Driver (U707) with select line U709-P23
■ SRAM (U706) and OTP/FLASH ROM (U705) with select line U709-P33
■ Transceiver board Synthesizer (U201) with select line U709-P35
■ Transceiver board DAC IC (U152) with select line U709-P26

The LCD Driver uses the master out/slave in (MOSI) line to send data to the display driver IC, and
the master in/slave out (MISO) line to send data back to the microprocessor (U709). Note, however,
that the keypad (or any other SPI device) can never initiate display data; the microprocessor is at all
times the SPI master device. Thus the MOSI line and MISO line are always in the master
configuration.

4.8 LED Control

The bi-colour LED on the top of the radio is indirectly activated by SPI of U709 via the DAC IC
(U152) on Transceiver Board. When either input to the dual NPN transistor (U410) is at logic high,
the corresponding output pin (pin 6 for the green LED, pin 3 for the red) should be at approximately
4.3 Vdc. Note that it is possible to have both LED outputs on simultaneously, in which case the LED
emits a yellow/orange light.

4.9 Audio & Data Circuitry

The transmit and receive audio paths are disabled in the standby mode and selectively enabled by
the microprocessor when the radio transmits or receives a signal. Also, there are minor differences
in the functioning of both paths depending on whether an internal or external (accessory)
microphone/speaker is being used. The radio constantly monitors the received data path for control-
channel data in trunking operation or sub-audible data in conventional operation.

6A.3-10 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.10 External PTT Sense Circuits

On connecting an external MIC through connector J3, external PTT sense transistor Q408 switches
“ON” when the external PTT switch is closed. Q408 collector voltage is monitored by U709-P4.
When collector voltage is logic “HIGH”, the microprocessor configures the radio for transmit mode.
In PTT equipped accessories, the PTT switch is series connected with the external MIC element.

4.11 MIC Amplifier

MIC audio from internal MIC MK401 is coupled through C429, L404, J3 and L403 to the MIC buffer
circuit U405-1. External MIC plug insertion mechanically disconnects the internal MIC. External MIC
audio is coupled through L403 to the MIC buffer input. The unity gain buffer will route the MIC audio
into MIC IN (U701-P7) through flex and connectors J200 and J700. Inside the ASFIC, the MIC audio
is amplified, filtered to eliminate components outside the 300-3000Hz voice band, pre-emphasized,
and then limited. The limited MIC audio is then routed through a summer, which is used to add in PL
or DPL sub-audio band modulation, and then to a splatter filter to eliminate high frequency spectral
components generated by the limiter. After the splatter filter, the audio is routed to the 8 bit
modulation attenuators, which are tuned in the factory of the field to set the proper amount of FM
deviation. The TX audio emerges from the ASFIC at U701-P55 is dc coupled and applied through
flex and connectors J700 and J200 to the synthesizer (U201) pin 8.

4.12 TX Data Circuits

There are four major types of transmit data: sub-audible data (PL/DPL/Connect Tone) that gets
summed with voice, high speed data for trunking control channel communication, DTMF data for
telephone communication in trunked and conventional systems, and MDC data for use in Motorola
proprietary MDC systems. The deviation levels of the latter three types are tuned by a 5-bit digital
attenuation inside the ASFIC. For each data type and each band split, there is a distinct set of tuning
values that are programmed into the ASFIC before the data is generated and transmitted.

4.13 Sub-Audible Data (PL/DPL)

Sub-audible data is composed of low-frequency PL and DPL waveforms for conventional operation
and connect tones for trunked voice channel operation. (The trunking connect tone is simply a PL
sine wave at a higher deviation level than PL in a conventional system). Although it is referred to as
“sub-audible data”, the actual frequency spectrum of these waveforms may be as high as 250Hz,
which is audible to the human ear. However, the radio receiver filters out any audio below 300Hz, so
these tones are never heard in the actual system.

Only one type of sub-audible data can be generated by U701 at any one time. The process is as
follows: using the SPI, the microprocessor programs the ASFIC (U701) to set up the proper low-
speed data deviation and select the PL or DPL filters. The microprocessor then generates a square
wave from U705-P6 which strobes the ASFIC PL_CLK (U701-P20). For encode input at twelve
times the desired data rate. (For example, for a PL frequency of 103Hz, the frequency of the square
wave at U701-P20 would be a1236Hz). This derives a tone generator inside U701, which generates
a staircase approximation to a PL sine wave or DPL data pattern. This internal waveform is then low-
pass filtered and summed with voice or data. The resulting summed waveform then appears on
U701-P55 (VCO_ATN), where it is sent to the transceiver board as previously described for transmit
audio.

Theory of Operation 6A.3-11

Controller

4.14 High-Speed Data

High-speed data refers to the 3600 baud data waveforms (ISWS AND OSWS) used in a trunking
system for high-speed communication between the radio and the central controller. To generate an
ISW, the microprocessor (U709) first programs the ASFIC (U701) to the proper filter and gain
settings. It then begins strobing U701-P54 (Trunking Clock In) with a square wave (from U709-P5) at
the same baud rate as the data. The output waveform from 5-3-2 State Encoder of U701 is then fed
to the post-limiter summer block and then the splatter filter. From that point it is routed through the
mode attenuator and then out of the ASFIC to the transceiver board via VCO_ATN (U701-P55).

4.15 DTMF Data

DTMF data is a dual-tone waveform used during phone interconnect operation. They are divided into
low-group and high-group tones. The high-group tone is generated by U709-P5 strobing U701-P54
at six times the tone frequency for tones less than 1440Hz, or twice the frequency for tones greater
than 1440Hz. The low-group tone is generated by U709-P7 strobing U701-P53 (DTMF Clock) at six
times the tone frequency. Inside U701 the low-group and high-group tones are summed (with the
amplitude of the high-group tone being approximately 2dB greater than that of the low-group tone)
and then pre-emphasized before being routed to the summer and splatter filter. The DTMF
waveform then follows the same path as was described for high speed data.

4.16 MDC Data

The MDC signal follows exactly the same path as the DTMF high-group tone. MDC data utilizes
MSK modulation, in which a logic zero is represented by one cycle of a 1200Hz sine wave, and a
logic one is 1.5 cycles of an 1800Hz sine wave. To generate the data, the microprocessor (U709)
first programs the ASFIC (U701) to the proper filter and gain settings. It then begins strobing U701-
P54 with a square wave (from U709-P5) at the same baud rate as the data. The output waveform
from U701 is fed to the post-limiter summer block and then the splatter filter. From that point it is
routed through the mode attenuator and then out of ASFIC to the transceiver board via VCO_ATN
(U701-P55).

4.17 RX Audio Processing and Digital Volume Control

The radio’s RF circuit are constantly producing an output at the Detected Audio line. Whenever the
radio is in trunked standby mode, it is processing data from the control channel; while in
conventional standby mode, it is always monitoring the squelch line and/or sub-audible data. The
detected audio from the transceiver board enters the controller board at connector J700 pin 4. In
addition to the detected audio line, the transceiver board also provides a squelch noise from U51-
P30 into the ASFIC squelch-detect circuitry via U701-P56. When the microprocessor is satisfied that
it has received the proper data or signal type for unsquelching, it sets up the receive audio path and
sends data to U701 to do the same within.

The detected audio will enter U701 through RX IN (pin 57) and PL IN (pin 63) for further processing.
Inside the IC, the signal first passes through a low-pass filter to remove any frequency components
above 3000Hz and then a high-pass filter to strip off any sub-audible data below 300Hz. Next, the
recovered audio passes through a de-emphasis filter to reduce the effects of FM noise. Finally, the
IC amplifies the audio and passes it through the 8-bit programmable attenuator whose level is set
depending on the value of the volume control. The microprocessor (U709) programs the value of the
8-bit attenuator in accordance with the voltage sensed at the volume potentiometer, which is
connected to U709-P48. This pin is one of the eight channels of U709’s 8 bit A/D convertor. After
passing through the 8-bit digital attenuator, the audio goes to a buffer amplifier and then exits at
U701-P66, where it is routed to the Audio power amplifier circuit in the transceiver board.

6A.3-12 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.18 Audio Power Amplifier

Resistor R466 sets the input impedance to U409-P2 of the audio power amp. The audio PA circuit is
a bridged-tied-load (BTL) configuration with fixed gain of 40dB, developing 500mW (rated audio
power) output at less than 5% harmonic distortion into the 16 ohm internal speaker LS401 with
nominal 7.5Vdc battery supply. Maximum audio power output is greater than 1.2 watts.

4.19 Audio PA Muting and Output Protection

PNP transistor Q410, the audio PA power switch, driven by NPN darlington transistor Q411, the PA
mute amp, controls Vcc supply to Audio PA U409-P1. U701-P5 is connected to Q411 base,
controlling audio PA Vcc supply. Resistors R489 and R490, PNP transistor Q412 and the current
sense circuit monitor current supplied to audio PA U409-P1. Worst case audio PA current (at 9Vdc
battery voltage, maximum volume and full system deviation) does not exceed 450mA at the nominal
16 ohm load. Resistor R488 and capacitor C461 provide an RC time delay for U405-2, a monostable
multivibrator circuit. A 2.5Vdc reference voltage is fed to U405-2-P6. On radio power-up, and in
normal operation U405-P7 monostable multivibrator output is logic “LO” pulling Q411 emitter to Vee
with the audio PA controlled by U701-P5. Should U409-P5 and/or U409-P8 become shorted to each
other or to the ground (Vee), current consumption exceeds 500 mA (approximately) and Q412
collector. When U405-2-P5 voltage rises higher than the U405-2-P6 reference voltage (rise time is
less than 50 usec), U405-2 is triggered and U405-2-P7 dc output voltage is switched to 4Vdc,
effectively biasing Q411 into cut-off and turning off the audio PA power switch Q410. U405-2-P7
remains in this state for 15 msec, then reset to logic “LO” state. Average power dissipation in the
audio PA circuit components is helped to a low level by the low duty cycle (less than 0.3%) of the
audio PA protection circuit. The cycle repeats until the audio PA output short is removed.

4.20 Receive Data Circuits

The ASFIC (U701) decodes all receive data, which includes PL, DPL, low-speed trunking, MDC,
and high-speed trunking data. The “decode” process for each data type typically involves low pass
or band pass filtering, signal amplification, and then routing the signal to a comparator, which
outputs a logic zero or one signal. The detected audio from the transceiver board is routed to U701-
P57 and P63 through coupling cap C435. Inside U701, the data is filtered according to the data type
(HS data or LS data, then hard-limited to a 0-5V digital level. The high-speed limited data output
(MDC and trunking high-speed) appears at U701-P51, where it connects to U709-P11. The low
speed limited data output (PL, DPL and trunking low-speed) appears at U701-P4, where it connects
to U709-P10.

4.21 Alert Tone Circuits

When the microprocessor needs to give the operator feedback (for a good key press or for a bad key
press) or radio status (trunked system busy, low battery condition, phone call, circuit failures), it
sends an alert tone to the speaker. It does so by sending data to U701, which sets up the audio path
to the speaker for alert tones. The alert tone itself can be generated in one of two ways: internally by
the ASFIC, or externally using the microprocessor and the ASFIC. The allowable internal alert tones
are 300, 900 and 1800Hz. For external alert tones, the microprocessor can generate any tone within
the 100-3000Hz audio band. This is accomplished by the microprocessor toggling the output line
U709-P7, which is also the same line used to generate low-group DTMF data. Inside the ASFIC, this
signal is routed to the external input of the alert tone generator. The output of the generator is
summed into the audio chain just after the RX audio de-emphasis block. The tone is then amplified
and filtered before passing through the 8-bit digital volume attenuator. The tone exits at U701-P66,
then is routed to the audio PA circuitry in the transceiver board.

Theory of Operation 6A.3-13

Controller

6A.3-14 Theory of Operation

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6A.4
PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists
Table of Contents

Description Page
UHF (403-433MHz) Diagrams and Parts Lists
Controller PCB Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Controller Schematic Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
RF PCB Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
RF Overall Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
RF (Receiver Module) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
RF (Synthesizer) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
RF (Transmitter Module) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
RX-FE Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-i

Table of Contents

6A.4-ii PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists

 Controller Board

DS702 DS701

DS704 DS703
J701 1
34

32 17
15 14 33 16
R799

C721

R781 C745
S01 S02 S03 S04
U706 U707
R755 C787 C746

R700 C700

VR707
48 1
49 64 TP7

C754
R790

C781
R711
R713

C744
CR707 S13 S14 S15 S16
Q704 R710
28 1
C719
C758
R787

Q703 16 Q700
Q705 17 C720
4 R763 C777 C786
5 U705

C718
R712
R753
U703

C716
C717
8 1 TP4 32 1
C711
R726

S07 S08 S09 S10

80 61 C407 H8 B8
R403

1 60 6 4
J7 A7
U704
1 3 R786
U701
C763
C406 C765
R725

R764

U709
TP2 J2 A2 S05 S06 S11 S12
H1 B1
R754
TP1
R756
C738
C761
C707
R751

C737 C708
C731
C743

20 41 C769
21 C733 R705 C710
40
28
C741
C732

2
C435
C747
C742
R468

Q702

R752
J700
1 27

Controller Board Controller Board

Component Side Solder Side
Component Side 8404599J03 GEPD5478-1

Controller Board
PCB No. 8404599J03

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-1

 Controller Schematic Diagram

Controller Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-3

 Controller Board- 8404599J03

Controller Board-
8404599J03

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

capacitor, fixed: pF +/-5%; 50V C754 2113743E20 100nF 10%

(unless otherwise stated)
C758 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C406 2113741F49 10000
C761 2113740F39 33
C407 2311049A40 TANT 2.2µF +/-10%
C763 2113741F49 10000
C435 2113743E20 100NF 10%
C765 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C700 2113743E07 22 nF
C769 2113740F55 150
C707 2113741F17 470
C777 2311049A07 TANT 1.0µF +/-10%
C708 2113741F49 10000
C781 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C710 2311049J11 TANT 4.7µF +/-10%
C786 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C711 2311049A07 TANT 1.0µF +/-10%
C787 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C716 2113743F08 0.22µF
resistor, fixed: ohm +/-5%; 1/8W
C717 2160521G37 100nF (unless otherwise stated)

C718 2113743E20 100nF 10% R403 0662057A97 100k

C719 2160521G37 100nF R468 0662057A73 10k

C720 2113741A45 10000 R700 0662057A97 100k

C721 2311049A01 0.1µF R705 0662057A89 47k

C731 2113743K15 0.1µF R710 0662057A89 47k

C732 2113743K15 0.1µF R725 0662057A93 68k

C733 2113740F55 150 R726 0662057A85 33k

C737 2113740F55 150 R751 0662057B47 0

C738 2113740F55 150 R752 0662057B47 0

C741 2113740F55 150 R753 0662057A73 10K

C742 2113740F55 150 R754 0662057B47 0

C743 2113740F55 150 R755 0662057A73 10k

C744 2113740F55 150 R756 0662057A73 10k

C745 2113740F55 150 R763 0662057A65 4700

C746 2113740F55 150 R764 0662057A73 10k

C747 2113740F55 150 R781 0662057C39 33

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-5

Controller Board- 8404599J03

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

R786 0662057A97 100K Flex, PCB:

R787 0662057A83 27K J701 8404628J02 Flex Heat Seal

R790 0662057A81 22K Non-Referenced Parts:

R799 0662057C39 33 6104617J01 Lightpipe
Connector:
7204616J01 LCD
J700 0904621J02 Connector, ZIF,
Controller 8404599J03 Pcb, Controller

Light Emitting Diode:

DS701 4805729G90 LED, green

DS702 4805729G90 LED, green

DS703 4805729G90 LED, green

DS704 4805729G90 LED, green

Diode, Transistor:

CR707 4813833C02 Diode Dual 70V '5B'

COMM CATH

Q700 4880214G02 NPN, MMBT3904

Q702 4880214G02 NPN, MMBT3904

Q703 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

Q704 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

Q705 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

VR707 4813830A27 Zener 14V 5% 225mW

Integrated Circuit:

U701 5105835U41 CC CONT 519/W52

F83G ASFIC

U703 5105462G76 EEPROM

U704 5180633C01 5V REGULATOR W/

RESET

U705 5105625U73 ROM

U706 5102463J27 RAM (32K X 8)

U707 5102463J21 MSM6606 DISPLAY

DRIVER

U709 5102226J34 MC68HC11K1CFU4

MICROPROCESSOR
(16 MHz)

6A.4-6 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board

CL6 CL7 CL8 CL11

SH104
3 4 3 4 5
L253 4 R256 R262 C33

L53
C226

C212
C227

L11
C233 Y51B

L204
Y201T 5 4 CF51 CF52

R252
C282
2 3 Q251 C283 6 3
T2

C56

C78
C30
C28 L55

CR203
R255 2 2

L203
R4602

C455

C258
C224 C272

L255
R253

Y51A
C268 2 3

L9
C58

R54
L268
C205 C232
5

L260

C59
C29
R254 5 30
C217 C279 C267 U51

C206

R207
8 5 R55
CR255 C55
C281 CR2

L262
C219

L201
C257 C278 R258 C266 4 L52

R205
C209
C73

C75
J6

C215
C259

L259
L258 4 3 2 R51 12 23
C79

L261

Y53
C265

SH105
C204

C74
R64
2 3 T1

L51
L58 C68

2
SH103

C269
C271

C51

C63
C270 C69 C67
4 5 C66 R57
SW401

C
C
R106
U252

R105

4
8
C117
R104

C418
R447 8 5 6 5 4 3 2

C419
CL5

C498

C116
U708

C425
L111
4
Q408
C421
J1

C424
R448
R452 C452 R169
R503 U101
R451 2
3

C464
4 4 L403 R170
C800 J2

C461

L710
U405 4

R173
U409

L404
C123

3
5 8

7
R702
C499
R488
C429
5 8 C124

L113
C409
C430 C102 C107
PB403 PB401 PB402 RF Board
CL4 CL3 CL2
Component Side

VR704
L54
R802
R803
R801
R804

C57
C454

CR405
C275 C789
C228

C208

C210 C273
R212
C207

C254 C251 CR51

C236

C211
C456 R60

CR251
SH101
JU51

C70
L252 R251 C54

R263

R52

C62
R211
R411
R409

C255 C253 C252 C476

R410

C457

C223 L717
R415

C77 R53

C82
R204
R408

C284
C472 L251

17
L254
R202 R203

21
22
17 24

16

R68

R497
R215 R206 16 25 C53 C71

C61
R414

C60
Q51

R67
C34
C235
R424 R261

L10

C13
R417 C202 U201 U251 C474

C83
C473 C256
C466 R260

4
2
CR201 C85 C87

10
C467 98 32 C216 L267 R66 DS401
C237

4
C468 R5

C263

C64
L256
R416

R58

C86

3
4

3
U410
C222 R201
C203

R413
C238 C261

Q405
R264

R412
C80
C262

6
C201 R257
C220
C221

CR253

L257
C260
C264

C436 C475
C276
SH100

VR401
CR202 C214 C285 C280

C459
C81
R162 C37
LOCKDET C231 C218 C229
C36

Q153
C156
C165 C157 C460

C410
R438
C158
R193

C443
SYNLE
C193

R167 SL R158
R216 C230

R6
C194

L406
5 8
J200

R168 C199 C159 R159

SRDATA
R494

22 4

R160
U151A 2 C119 R102
C151

Q151
C154
21 5
C480
R450
R449
C426

4 R166 R161

C118
SRCLOCK C120 CR102 L405 3
C437

R489 U152 R157 C153 C101

17 9 C152 C163
C469

DACLE R490 16 10 Q154 C111

C105
C438 Q410 C121 2
R469

R154

C115
R155

Q152

L104
R101 L112
R507

J3

L106
R172
C481 R171
C428
C479 R466

C442 R153

C113
Q156

CR101
R156
Q411

C427 R179 C112 L109

R175

Q412 Q155 L101 L105 4

R174 C103

L102
CL9
R467
C441

RESET GND SB+ R496 R151 C166 5

L108
6

C122
L107 C114
R152 C164
RF Board

SH102
J5

C110
C104

C108
C106
C109

C162
1 2 3 4 L103

Solder Side

RF Board
PCB No. 8404732J01

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-7

 RF Schematic Diagram

BATTERY
GRAPHICS ONLY
0180702489 BATT FILTER BOARD
* CONNECTION VIA CHASSIS
R497 SCI SCI
470 refer to R460 C3
SW402-1 CONN_BPLUS
39
L710 SW_ONOFF
5V SWB+ TXB+ EN_BIAS 5V SWB+ 5R THERMAL FUSE
F1
390nH P/O VOL
U708 C421 L1 L2 4A
.47uf CHG+
8 VIN VOUT
1 CR405 C1 C2 C4
6 5V_TAP SENSE 2 NU 39 39
7 FEEDBACK GND 4
C419 5 ERROR SHUTDOWN 3 SWB+
.018uf
(SOURCE) CHG-
5V SWB+ TXB+ 5V SWB+ 5R
C418 J200
10uf (SOURCE) CONN_89982-28
EN_BIAS SQATTNIN 5V 1 SWB+
2 GND
DETAUDIO 3 SQATTNIN
TRANSMITTER RX_IN RX_IN RECEIVER 4 DETAUDIO
RSSI 5 RSSI
CHAIN CHAIN 6 ADAPT
RX_INJ
ADAPT 7 LOCKDET
8 SYNLE
9 MODIN
CLK RESET DACLE TX_INJ 10 SB1
11 SB2
5V 12 ROT1
13 ROT2
(SOURCE FROM ASFIC) 14 2.5V
15 5V
16 MICIN
17 SRDATA
RX_INJ 5V 18 RXAUDIO
LOCKDET 19 GCB1
C497 20 VOL
CLK RESET DACLE SYNLE NU R447 21 PTT
22 EXTPTTSENSE
MODIN SB1 SB2 2.5V 5V 5V 23 SCI
NU C425 24 SRCLOCK
TX_INJ VOLUME
C424 NU 25 DACLE
DATA SRDATA PORT
SYNTHESIZER L717 26 RESET
VOL SENSE 27 GND
CLK SRCLK NU R460-2 XX .39uH 28 2.1MHZ
C480
NU XX
R448 R450 C789 VR704
2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ SW_ 100pf 6.8V
0 ONOFF XX
NU PTT DATA CLK DACLE RESET 2.1MHZ
U405-1
OPAMP_4PIN N2 C802
N1 C426 C427 NU
1 2
.22uf .22uf L403
R507 R489 R490 3 J3
SWB+
1000 2.7 2.7 N3 390nH EXT_MIC-SPKR
1/8W 1/8W N4 4 MMBT3906 R451 S22
C428 2200 C481
2 R449 150pf 3 Q408 150pf
SWB+ R494 S33
Q412 100K EXT MIC
2 100K
MMBT3906 1 MIC FILTER 1 S11
C438
C461 1
3 4.7uf 2.5V C410 VR401 J5 CONN_4PIN
3 2 R452 150pf C409 C436
.1uf C464 150pf 10V 150pf 1
3 R503 180K MK401
R488 5V
220K 8 N4
Q410 1 Q411 2 INT MIC
N3 5 .1uf MMBTA13 330 C452
M41L03 C498 L404
7 2 4.7uf
6 150pf 390nH
N1
SHIELDS AND BUTTERFLY CLIPS N2 R496
2.5V
U405-2 330
C429
LS401
4700pf 3
OPAMP_4PIN L405 R702
390nH 2000 4 INT SPKR
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EN_BIAS 16 ohm
AUDIO AMPLIFIER C499 C430 C442
CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL R467 J4
U409 150pf 150pf 1000pf EXT_MIC-SPKR
10 S22
CL11 CL9 CL8 CL7 CL6 CL5 CL4 CL3 CL2 TDA7052
R469 1 Vp 5 C441 S33
OUTPUT1
.1uf EXT SPKR
C437 1800 L406
2 8 S11
INPUT OUTPUT2

GND0
GND1
R466 390nH

NC0

NC1
.47uf C443
SH101 SH100 SH103 SH104 SH105 C469 4700 1000pf
47pf C479
SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 470pf 3 6 4 7
NC NC
1 1 1 1 1

5V ROT1

C801 ROT2
SW401 NU R801 R802 R803 R804 R409 43K
SW_FREQ_16POS 10K 10K 10K 10K
SB1 SB2 PTT 8 R408 20K
PC3
PC2 4
C466 C467 C468 PC1 2 R411 43K
1
C0
C1

PC0
150pf 150pf 150pf R410 20K
C460 C475 C459 C474 C456 C454 C457 C455
150pf 150pf 150pf 150pf .01uf .01uf .01uf .01uf
R424 R416 R417
100 100 100 R414 R415
C476 C473 C472 510K 510K
150pf 150pf 150pf
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF OVERALL CIRCUIT

PMLE4022A UHF1 (403-433MHZ) 12.5KHZ RF

1 2 1 2 1 2
SW_TACTILE

SW_TACTILE
SW_TACTILE

PB401 PB402 PB403

GEPD5559
MON OPT2 PTT

RF Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-9

 RF Schematic Diagram

FIRST MIXER L52

C34 C37
.47uH
.01uf NU CR2-1
2
FRONT END RECEIVER MODULE VOLT
R5 1,2 1 T2
3 4 Y51A
5V 5,6
R51 L51 45.1MHZ
MODRF_6PIN 160 6 8 2 C30 INSTPAR
XFMR
C13 150pf .15uH 1 3
U252 1 5
51
C53 L53 C77
150pf
L11 L9 L10 22pf 1.2uH 3pf

1
2
3
4
5
6
R6 T1 33nH 18nH .15uH C51 2
4 3
CR2-2 5R
RX_IN 22 VOLT
C36 XFMR 2 C33 C28 C29 82pf
6.2pf 7,8
C119 5 7 1.5pf 24pf 9.1pf
6.2pf 5 1
4
3,4

RX_INJ

4F(N) 6F(N)
4D(W) 4E(W)
C55 R55 CF51 CF52
5R 455kHz FILTER 455kHz FILTER_6POLE
.1uf 100 1 3 1 5
R54

2.5VDC

2.5VDC
2000
R52

33K C61
2

3.8VDC
C82 2 3 4
R67 JU51 1500pf
2.9VDC NU CR51 INSTPAR
4 3 36 35 33 32 INSTPAR
.1uf 6800

FIL_CAP_OUT
IF_AMP_OUT
2ND_IF_OUT

IF_AMP_IN

FIL_CAP_IN
LIM_IN
C56
3 JUMPER
20pf Y51B C78
C59
C54 INSTPAR 0.75VDC 6 PPC_AMP_IN
0.7VDC 1 Q51
1 3 0
NPN C57 L54 L55 C58 .1uf 1.5VDC 5
15pf NU NU 1.5uH NU DEMOD_OUT 31
R53 PPC_AMP_OUT
12K 2 45.1MHZ 2.0VDC
MMBR941 2
C60 .47uf
.1uf C62
8 IF_IN
3.0VDC AUDIO_IN 29 2.4VDC
1
GND
13 A+_B+ 28 2.5VDC
DETAUDIO
14 DRIVE AUDIO_OUT
SWB+
C75 4.4VDC 7 LO_IN U51 23 2.4VDC
C80
NU
3.9pf SQ_LIM_OUT
C73
2.6VDC 10 IFIC C63
OSC_OUT
20 2.4VDC
2 SQ_ATTEN_IN
Y53 13pf C74 R64 3.4VDC 9
R66 OSC_FB 51pf
820 45MHz 36pf 5600
27 22
5R T_R ADAPT ADAPT
44.645 1
2 5.0VDC(UNSQ)
VCC1 0VDC(SQ)
15 C87
C79 SQ_OUT 5.0VDC(UNSQ)
12 150pf
16pf VCC2 0VDC(SQ)
2.4VDC
17 18
5V VCC3 FAST_SQ
L58
INSTPAR 34
C71 C70 VCC4

PCC_2_SU
R68

RSSI_OUT
SQ_TAIL
30
10uf .1uf SQ_NOISE SQATTNIN

FILTER

SQ_IN
C81
3.7VDC 25 1000

ICO
RSSI_OUT_2
C83 C85 C86 R60
.1uf 16 19 11 26 24 150pf 150pf 150pf 130K

3-5VDC

3-5VDC RSSI

C69 C68 R57 C66 R58 C64

.039uf 130K C67 .1uf 13K 150pf
3.3uf 4.7uf

0.5-3.0VDC

0.65VDC
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF RECEIVER CHAIN
PMLE4022A UHF1 (403 433MHZ) 12 5KHZ RF BOARD
RF (Receiver Module) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-11

 RF Schematic Diagram

R256
RX_INJ
1500 C283
C282 3
470pf 150pf
1 Q251
NPN R262
MMBR941 390
2

R252
C260
4.3pf
R255 10K
11K
C272 C261
6.2pf R257 C280 3.9pf C231
C263 CR253 .01uf C237
C285 R264 C238 100pf 5V
R258 39K 3.3pf 100pf
C267 100 150pf R260 L256 150pf 100 C202
220 470nH C262 C264 L286
C204 5.0VDC (LOCKED)
150pf C268 C266 .01uf NU 0VDC (UNLOCKED)
FILT5V
1000pf 150pf L257 C278 9.1pf 9.1pf
470nH 4.7uf CR202 CR201
L259 .22uf L267 C203 C286
L255 L258 82nH C222
390nH 6 3 7 8 9 .01uf NU C228 C219 LOCKD
L262 390nH 34.4nH
L260 150pf 150pf
VCC
NC1

NC2

E1B

E1A
LA1

27nH 15nH L201 R205 1000pf 12.6VDC SYNLE

2 RX 11 C256
B1 FILT5V 390nH 3300 3-10VDC
C269 L261 C259
4 TX R202 32 10 9 2 7
TX_INJ U251 BI1 12 150pf 150pf C215 C216
.1uf 2700

V_MULT_1

V_MULT_2
8.2nH

LOCK
VCP

CEX
150pf C265 5600pf 3-10VDC 29 I_OUT
22 NC4 .1uf
C271 C270
NU VCOBIC VC 13 C253 L254 SL 31 I_ADAPT 8 2.5VDC
NU 22pf C255 82nH R201 C201 MOD_IN MODIN
R261 82 NU T1 R206 R215
24 NC5 2.5VDC
BI2 14 1
4 GND FREQ_OUT
11
2.1MHZ
220 C284 11pf
CR251 C214 3-10VDC 13 GND 12 2200 1000 R216
1pf L253 DC_5V_REF_OSC 5V
1 GND2 B2 15 C279 1uf U201 24K C218
GND1

.22uf L251 27.5nH 30 GND 14 2.0VDC C223 1000pf

RBY

TRB

NC3
E2B

E2A

C254 XTAL_1
LA2

FRACTN-32 33pf
PS

390nH 3.3pf 28 MOD_OUT 15 C205

R254 C217 XTAL_2 220pf C230
19 21 23 5 20 18 17 16 L268 10K 10.0uf 1.2VDC .1uf
2.5VDC 1 AUX_3 16

DC_5V_REF_DIV
C275 WARP

DC_5V_PRESC
C252
L252 390nH C257 C258 20 PRE_IN 17 4.65VDC C206 R207 C232 2

SUP_F_OUT
6.8pf R253 R211

DC_5V_SRL
C235 Y201T
SUP_CAP
2200 NU

SRL_DATA
390nH CR255 47pf

CP_BIAS1
CP_BIAS2

SUP_F_IN
150pf NU

SRL_CLK
150pf R263 1800 .018uf 47K 16.8MHz

TEST_1

TEST_2
39K C207 1
C281 0.7VDC(R) 4.7uf C233

GND
1.5VDC
R251 C251
150pf 8.2pf 4.2VDC(T)
30K FILT5V
6 5 27 26 18 21 19 23 3 22 24 25 6.8pf
C209 NC NC CR203
FILT5V 150pf
C273 C224
150pf 150pf
L204
C211 .22uf
33nH
C227 C226 4.7uf C229
C276 NU R212 R203 R204
.01uf NU NU 220K 100K
L203
390nH 4.65VDC
(SOURCE)
FILT5V C210 C212 C236
4.7uf 1000pf 150pf

C208
C220 C221
4.7uf 150pf 150pf
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF SYNTHESIZER
5V
DATA PMLE4022A UHF1 (403-433MHZ) 12.5KHZ RF BOARD

GEPD5555

RF (Synthesiser) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-13

 RF Schematic Diagram

C120 CR102
RX_IN
150pf C109 TXB+
C118 R102
150pf 330

NU

C123 L103 L101 C102 C110

270nH 270nH 1uf 150pf
C104
L112 150pf
4T
INSTPAR L113 150pf
HARMONIC FILTER NU 2 4
VS1 VS2
J2 L109 L108 L107 3
C121 CR101 C103 C116
RF_JACK 4T 4T 4T VCONT R105
6 1
RF_OUT RF_IN TX_INJ
1 S1 INSTPAR INSTPAR INSTPAR VS3
5
150pf 150pf 150pf 27
VS4 R104 R106
2 S2 C115 C114 C113 C112 L106 U709 180 180
L111 5.1pf 15pf 15pf 9.1pf 270nH SHW5066
TXB+
J1 3 S3 INSTPAR
ANTENNAE
L102 C106
C111 L104
(SOURCE)
C117 150pf BEAD C107 C108 270nH
NU .018uf .018uf L105 150pf
BEAD C167
NU
5V C105
C164

R101
10uf
3
SWB+ C158 150pf C168
Q154 .01uf 0.1 R174
TO U51-PIN 13,14 C101 1W C122 C124 C162 R151 NU
M41L03 R153 Q155
4.7uf NU 20pf 150pf 56.2K 1
Q405 2 22 100K NPN
2 3 1%
SWB+ MMBT3906
R175 MMBT3904
R438 SENSE HI 6200
R161 2
680 1 3300
1 R155 SENSE LO
5R 3 1
3 VDD 56.2K
SOURCE 1%
U152 R154 R152
SWB+ Q153 1 22
CLK DAC DAC2 11 100K 100K
4.52VDC(HI)
MMBT3904 24 9 1% 1%
RESET DAC1 2.00VDC(LO)
NPN C199 21 3
150pf EN BIAS_EN
2 C156 16 2
150pf TEMP ANT_SEL
14 8 R171 C153
U410 BATT 2_POLE_V 51K
15 12 C152 C163 C151 .1uf R166
AUX FREQ_SW_DA 180
1 4 NPN_DUAL R162 10
R_T
120 23 17
4
DATA_IN SCB1
18 150pf 150pf 150pf
Q152
5 2 R157
FREQ_SW0 SCB2 MJD2955
5 19 1800
FREQ_SW1 SCB3
6 20 N3 N2 R167 3 2
FREQ_SW2 SCB4 R172 U151A-1 SWB+
6 3 7 22K 3 2 16K
FREQ_SW3 OPAMP_4PIN
4 R160 TO U51-PIN 13,14
VSS N4 680
C193
13 1
R412 R413 3 1.65VDC(HI)
180 680 1 NU C165
N1 0.75VDC(LO)
Q156 U151A-2 .01uf
1 OPAMP_4PIN 3
NPN R193
DS401 DATA N2 Q151
3 1 MMBT3904 6 N1 1
NU NPN R158
2 N3 7
R179 R156 2.31VDC(HI) MMBT3904
5
8N4 180
3900 C800 R168 1.40VDC(LO)
360 R173 R170 2
C159 4.7uf 100K C154
150pf C166 R159
4 2 CLK RESET DACLE NU
LED_DUAL .47uf NU
2.91VDC(HI) 180
R169 C157 150pf
1.11VDC(LO)

10K
.01uf

5V

EN_BIAS

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF TRANSMITTER CHAIN

PMLE4022A UHF1 (403-433MHZ) 12.5KHZ RF BOARD

GEPD5557
RF (Transmitter Module) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-15

 RF Board 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404732J01

RF Board 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing-

8404732J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

Capacitor, fixed: pF +/-5%; 50V C075 2113740A17 3.9

(unless otherwise stated)
C077 2113740A14 3
C013 2113740A59 150
C079 2113740A34 16
C028 2113740A38 24
C081 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%
C029 2113740A28 9.1
C082 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%
C030 2113740A59 150
C083 2113740A59 150
C033 2113740A07 1.5
C085 2113740A59 150
C034 2113741A45 10000
C086 2113740A59 150
C036 2113740A23 6.2
C087 2113740A59 150
C051 2113740A53 82
C101 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V
C053 2113740A37 22
C102 2311049A07 1.0 uF, 10%; 25V
C054 2113740A33 15
C103 2113740A59 150
C055 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V
C104 2113740A59 150
C056 2113740A36 20
C105 2311049J25 10 uF, 10%; 16V
C059 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V
C106 2113740A59 150
C060 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%
C107 2113741A51 18000
C061 2113741A25 1500
C108 2113741A51 18000
C062 2311049A05 0.47 uF, 10%; 16V
C110 2113740A59 150
C063 2113740A48 51
C111 2113740A59 150
C064 2113740A59 150
C112 2113740A28 9.1
C065 2113741A45 10000
C113 2113740A33 15
C066 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V
C114 2113740A33 15
C067 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V
C115 2113740A20 5.1
C068 2113741A59 39000
C116 2113740A59 150
C069 2311049J07 3.3 uF, 10%; 16V
C118 2113740A59 150
C070 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%
C119 2113740A23 6.2
C071 2311049J25 10 uF, 10%; 16V
C120 2113740A59 150
C073 2113740A32 13
C121 2113740A59 150
C074 2113740A42 36
C123 2113740A59 150

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-17

RF Board 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404732J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

C124 2113740A36 20 C221 2113740A59 150

C151 2113740A59 150 C222 2113741A21 1000

C152 2113740A59 150 C223 2113740A41 33

C153 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20% C224 2113740A59 150

C154 2113740A59 150 C228 2113740A59 150

C156 2113740A59 150 C229 2113743A23 220 nF

C157 2113741A45 10000 C230 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%

C158 2113741A45 10000 C231 2113741A45 10000

C159 2113740A59 150 C233 2113740G24 6.8, 0.1

C162 2113740A59 150 C235 2113741A51 18000

C163 2113740A59 150 C236 2113740A59 150

C164 2113740A59 150 C237 2113740A55 100

C165 2113741A45 10000 C238 2113740A55 100

C166 2311049A05 0.47 uF, 10%; 16V C251 2113740A27 8.2

C202 2113741A45 10000 C252 2113740A24 6.8

C203 2113741A45 10000 C253 2113740A37 22

C204 2311049J27 10 uF, 10%; 25V C254 2113740A15 3.3

C205 2113740A63 220 C255 2113740A30 11

C206 2113740G46 47, +/-2% C256 2113740A59 150

C207 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V C257 2113740A59 150

C208 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V C259 2113740A59 150

C209 2113740A59 150 C260 2113740A18 4.3

C210 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V C261 2113740A17 3.9

C211 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V C262 2113740A28 9.1

C212 2113741A21 1000 C263 2113740A15 3.3

C213 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V C264 2113740A28 9.1

C214 2311049A07 1.0 uF, 10%; 16V C265 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V

C215 2113741A39 5600 C266 2113740A59 150

C216 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20% C267 2113740A59 150

C217 2311049J25 10 uF, 10%; 16V C268 2113741A21 1000

C218 2113741A21 1000 C269 2113740A59 150

C219 2113740A59 150 C270 2113740A09 1.8

C220 2113740A59 150 C271 2113740A21 5.6

6A.4-18 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404732J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

C272 2113740A23 6.2 C455 2113741A45 10000

C273 2113740A59 150 C456 2113741A45 10000

C275 2113740A59 150 C457 2113741A45 10000

C276 2113741A45 10000 C459 2113740A59 150

C278 2311049A03 0.33 uF, 10%; 25V C460 2113740A59 150

C279 2311049A03 0.33 uF, 10%; 25V C461 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V

C280 2113740A59 150 C464 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V

C281 2113740A59 150 C466 2113740A59 150

C282 2113740A71 470 C467 2113740A59 150

C283 2113740A59 150 C468 2113740A59 150

C284 2113740A03 1 C469 2113740A46 47

C285 2113740A59 150 C472 2113740A59 150

C409 2113740A59 150 C473 2113740A59 150

C410 2113740A59 150 C474 2113740A59 150

C418 2311049J25 10 uF, 10%; 16V C475 2113740A59 150

C419 2113741A51 18000 C476 2113740A59 150

C421 2311049A05 0.47 uF, 10%; 25V C479 2113740A71 470

C424 2113740A64 240 C480 2113740A59 150

C425 2113741A59 39000 C481 2113740A59 150

C426 2113741A51 18000 C701 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V

C427 2113741A51 18000 C789 2113740A55 100

C428 2113740A59 150 C800 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V

C429 2113741A37 4700 R68 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%

C430 2113740A59 150 Filter:

C434 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V CF51 9180453B04 mini ceramic filter -6 pole

C436 2113740A59 150 CF52 9180453B04 mini ceramic filter -6 pole

C437 2311049A05 0.47 uF, 10%; 16V Clip:

C438 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V CL1-CL4 4280138R02 butterfly

C441 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20% CL6-CL9 4280138R02 butterfly

C442 2113740A79 1000 Diode:

C443 2113740A79 1000 CR002 4880174R01 DIODE QUAD SOIC 8-pin

C452 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V CR051 4880154K03 dual Schottky mixer

C454 2113741A45 10000 CR101 4880973Z02 PIN diode

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-19

RF Board 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404732J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

CR102 4880973Z02 PIN diode L055 2483411T75 chip shielded

CR201 4813833C07 dual 100 W L058 2483411T74 chip shielded

CR202 4813833C07 dual 100 W L101 2411087A19 0.27 uH

CR203 4802245J22 varactor L102 2411087A19 0.27 uH

CR251 4862824C01 varactor L103 2411087A19 0.27 uH

CR253 4862824C01 varactor L104 2484657R01 ferrite bead

CR255 4862824C01 varactor L105 2484657R01 ferrite bead

CR401 4880939T01 Schottky barrier L106 2411087A19 0.27 uH

CR402 4813833C07 dual 100 W L107 2483035N76 coil airwound

CR403 4813833C07 dual 100 W L108 2483035N76 coil airwound

CR404 4813833C07 dual 100 W L109 2483035N76 coil airwound

CR405 4880107R01 silicon rectifier L111 2483035N13 coil air 24AWG 5TNS

Light Emitting Diode: L112 2483035N76 coil airwound

DS401 4805729G49 diode red/yel L201 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

Mechanical: L203 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

H101 300136783 screw 2-56" X 5/16" 2 off L204 2462587N47 chip 33 nH, 5%

H102 1405160A02 insulator, crystal L251 2461587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

H103 0780511B01 bracket, freq switch, L252 2461587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
plated
L253 2480145S07 RF coil 1-1/2T brass core
Connector, Receptacle:
L254 2462587N52 chip 82 nH, 5%
J1 3980515C02 antenna contact
L255 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
J2 0180117S05 RF jack assembly
L256 2462587N61 chip 470 nH, 5%
J3 0180417C01 assembly option jack
L257 2462587N61 chip 470 nH, 5%
J5 0180195R03 speaker microphone
header L258 2480145S08 2-1/2 violet toko

J6 0180965Z01 connector B+ L259 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

J200 0904358J02 28-pin interface connector L260 2462587N46 chip 27 nH, 5%

Coil, Inductor: L261 2462587N47 chip 33 nH, 5%

L009 2462587N44 chip 18 nH, 5% L262 2462587N43 chip 15 nH, 5%

L010 2483411T63 chip shielded L267 2462587N52 chip 82 nH, 5%

L011 2462587N47 chip 33 nH, 5% L268 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

L051 2483411T63 chip shielded L403 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

L052 2462587N61 chip 470 nH, 5% L404 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

L053 2462587N69 chip 1200 nH, 5% L405 2461587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

6A.4-20 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404732J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

L406 2462587N60 chip 390 nH, 5% R052 0662057D12 33K

L710 2462587N60 chip 390 nH, 5% R053 0662057D02 12K

L717 2462587N60 chip 390 nH, 5% R054 0662057C82 2000

T1 2580163M03 XFMR coil R055 0662057C51 100

T2 2580163M03 XFMR coil R057 0662057D27 130K

Meter: R058 0662057D03 13K

0705196A11 SUPR XTAL mounting R059 0662057D23 91K

M501 4280126S01 clip PA R064 0662057C93 5600

4080485C03 switch tactile R066 0662057C73 820

Transistor: R067 0662057C95 6800

Q051 4813827A07 NPN SML SIG R101 0680106R01 0.1, +/-1%

Q151 4880214G02 NPN R102 0662057C63 330

Q152 4813822A10 PNP 60V 10A R104 0662057C57 180

Q153 4880214G02 NPN R105 0662057C37 27

Q154 4880141L03 PNP R106 0662057C57 180

Q155 4880214G02 NPN R151 0660076F29 56.2K, +/-1%

Q156 4880214G02 NPN R152 0660076F01 100K

Q251 4813827A07 NPN SML SIG R153 0662057C35 22

MMBR941LT1
R154 0660076F01 100K
Q405 4805128M67 NPN
R155 0660076F29 56.2K, +/-1%
Q406 4805128M67 NPN
R156 0662057C89 3900
Q407 4805128M67 NPN
R157 0662057C81 1800
Q408 4805128M67 NPN
R158 0662057C57 180
Q409 4805128M67 NPN
R159 0662057C57 180
Q410 4880141L03 PNP
R160 0662057C71 680
Q411 4805128M19 SOT-23
R161 0662057C71 680
Q412 4805128M67 NPN
R162 0662057C53 120
Resistor, Fixed: Ohm +/-5%; 1/8W
R166 0662057C57 180
C084 0662057C01 0
R167 0662057D05 16K
C78 0662057C01 0 ohms
R168 0662057D24 100K
R005 0662057C56 160
R169 0662057C99 10K
R006 0662057C35 22
R171 0662057D17 51K
R051 0662057C44 51
R172 0662057D08 22K

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-21

RF Board 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404732J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

R174 0662057D24 100K R414 0662057D41 510K

R175 0662057C94 6200 R415 0662057D41 510K

R179 0662057C64 360 R416 0662057C51 100

R201 0662057C49 82 R417 0662057C51 100

R202 0662057C83 2200 R424 0662057C51 100

R203 0662057D32 220K R432 0662057D07 20K

R204 0662057D24 100K R438 0662057C87 3300

R205 0662057C87 3300 R444 0662057D07 20K

R206 0662057C83 2200 R447 0662057C93 5600

R207 0662057C83 2200 R448 0662057C99 10K

R211 0662057D16 47K R449 0662057D24 100K

R212 0662057D11 30K R450 0662057C99 10K

R215 0662057C75 1000 R451 0662057C83 2200

R216 0662057D09 24K R452 0662057D30 180K

R251 0662057D11 30K R455 0662057D11 30K

R252 0662057C99 10K R460 1880143S03 Volume potentiometer

R253 0662057C81 1800 R466 0662057C91 4700

R254 0662057C99 10K R467 0662057C27 10

R255 0662057D01 11K R469 0662057C81 1800

R256 0662057C79 1500 R475 0662057C99 10K

R257 0662057D14 39K R478 0662057D11 30K

R258 0662057C51 100 R479 0662057C99 10K

R260 0662057C59 220 R488 0662057D32 220K

R261 0662057C59 220 R489 0611077A12 2.7

R262 0662057C65 390 R490 0611077A12 2.7

R263 0662057D14 39K R494 0662057D24 100K

R264 0662057C51 100 R496 0662057C63 330

R408 0662057D07 20K R497 0662057C67 470

R409 0662057D15 43K R503 0662057C63 330

R410 0662057D07 20K R506 0662057D09 24K

R411 0662057D15 43K R507 0662057C75 1000

R412 0662057C57 180 R702 0662057C82 2000

R413 0662057C71 680 R801 0662057C99 10K

6A.4-22 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404732J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

R802 0662057C99 10K Y51B 9180112R06 45.1 Mhz crystal filter

R803 0662057C99 10K Y53 4880008K02 XTAL resonator 44.645

MHz
R804 0662057C99 10K
Y201 4880114R02 crystal 16.8MHz
Shield:
Non-Referenced Items
SH100 2680966Y01 synthesizer, front
8404732J01 PCB, 12.5kHz UHF QFP
SH101 2680970Y01 VCO, front version
SH102 2680136S01 harmonic filter 0780165R02 BOOT, crystal
SH103 2680970Z02 VCO, front

SH104 2680958Z02 MIXER, back

SH105 2680968Z02 VCO, back

Switch:

SW401 4080502B01 16-position ;freq.

PB401 4080485C05 tactile, pushbutton

PB402 4080485C05 tactile, pushbutton

PB403 4080485C05 tactile, pushbutton

Integrated Circuit:

U051 5180207R01 IF

U101 5105492X79 RF power module-

LDMOS

U151 5180932W01 linear op-amp

U152 5105226P38 DAC

U201 5105457W61 synthesizer, QFP

U251 5105414S84 VCO

U252 0180707Y49 UHF Rx module

U407 5180932W01 linear op-amp

U409 5180175R01 Audio amplifier

U410 5180159R01 dual trans NPNS

U708 T5105469E65 voltage regulator

Zener Diode:

VR401 4880140L15 10V Zener

VR704 4880140L10 SOT

Crystal:

Y51A 9180112R06 45.1 Mhz crystal filter

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-23

6A.4-24 Diagrams and Parts Lists
 RF Schematic Diagram

TP3
T1
1

SHIELD SIDE C14

150pf
C27 C28
3.9pf S5 150pf

R3 C15 C16 C18 C19 C21 C22 C24 C25

1 2 3 4 5 6 1
T1 TP5
(G) (IN) (5V) (G) (OUT)(G) 13K 2.2pf 5.1pf 9.1pf 4.7pf 6.8pf 6.2pf 5.6pf 11pf
R2
3
3900
TP2 C2 C3 C5 C6 C8 C9 C11 C13
1 1
Q1
T1 C17 S7 C20 S8 C23 S9 C26
NPN S6
10pf 8.2pf 6.8pf 8.2pf 3.6pf 8.2pf 15pf 12pf 8.2pf 20pf 13pf 11pf
MMBR941
2
C12 TP4 1
C1 S1 C4 S2 C7 C10 20pf R1 1 T1 TP6
6.8pf 12pf 12pf S3 20pf 4700 T1
TP1
S4
T1 1 CR1

FRONT END RECEIVER MODULE

P/N: 0180707Y49
UHF1 (403-433MHz) 12.5kHz

GEPD5558

RX FE Module Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-25

 RX_FE Module 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing - 8480480D01

RX_FE Module 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing -

8480480D01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

Capacitor,Fixed: pF +/-5% ; 50V Diode:

(Unless Otherwise Stated)
CR1 4880154K03 dual Schottky mixer
C1 2113740G24 6.8
Transistor:
C2 2113740G29 10
Q1 4882022N67 NPN
C4 2113740G31 12
Resistor, Fixed: Ohm +/-5%; 1/8W
C5 2113740G24 6.8
R1 0662057C91 4700
C6 2113740G27 8.2
R2 0662057C89 3900
C7 2113740G31 12
R3 0662057D03 13K
C8 2113740G16 3.6
Non-Referenced Items
C9 2113740G27 8.2
8480480D01 printed circuit board
C10 2113740G36 20
0780102S01 leadframe; 3 used
C11 2113740G33 15

C12 2113740G36 20

C13 2113740G31 12

C15 2113740G11 2.2

C16 2113740G20 5.1

C17 2113740G27 8.2

C17 2113740G27 8.2

C18 2113740G28 9.1

C19 2113740G19 4.7

C20 2113740G36 20

C21 2113740G24 6.8

C22 2113740G23 6.2

C23 2113740G32 13

C24 2113740G21 5.6

C25 2113740G30 11

C26 2113740G30 11

C27 2113740G17 3.9

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6A.4-27

RX_FE Module 403-433MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing - 8480480D01

6A.4-28 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6B
146-174MHz Specific Information
Table of Contents

Chapter
6B.1 Model Chart and Test Specifications

6B.2 Radio Tuning Procedure

6B.3 Theory of Operation

6B.4 PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists

146-174MHz Specific Information 6B-i

Table of Contents

6B-ii 146-174MHz Specific Information

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6B.1
Model Chart and Test Specifications
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview......................................................................................................1

2.0 Model Chart .................................................................................................1

3.0 Technical Specification ............................................................................. 2

3.1 General ........................................................................................................ 2
3.2 Receiver....................................................................................................... 2
3.3 Transmitter................................................................................................... 2
3.4 Battery Life....................................................................................................2

Model Chart and Test Specifications 6B.1-i

Table of Contents

6B.1-ii Model Chart and Test Specifications

 Overview

1.0 Overview
6B.1

This chapter lists the VHF models and technical specifications for the GP600 portable radio.

2.0 Model Chart

GP600 146-174 MHz 12.5 kHz 5W MPT D
GP600 146-174 MHz 12.5 kHz 5W MPT

GP600
Description

VHF
146 - 174 MHz
X = Indicates one of each required
AZP93VJB05N2_E
AZP93VJA05N2_E
Model

Item Description
X X PMLD4049_ RF Board, 12.5 kHz, (146-174 MHz)
X PMLN4086_ GP600 Front Cover Display Kit
X PMLN4087_ GP600 Front Cover Non-Display Kit
X X HLN9667_ Chassis Hardware Assembly
X X NAD6502_ Antenna (146-174 MHz)
X X HNN9628_ Battery
X X 6802908X01_ GP600 User Guide

Model Chart and Technical Specifications 6B.1-1

3.0 Technical Specification

3.1 General 3.3 Transmitter

Frequency Range VHF: 146-174 MHz Power Output 1-5W

(no degradation) ........... ...
Channel Spacing 12.5/25 kHz
Maximum Deviation
Modulation FM, 12.5kHz ± 2.5
Type 8K5G3, 25kHz ±5
14G3,16G3
Audio Distortion <3 %
Antenna Impedance 50 ohms (@1kHz, 60% deviation)

Mode of Operation Trunked/Conventional Spurious and Harmonics -36 dBm

Power Supply 1200 mAH Battery Switching Bandwidth 28 MHz

No degradation .......... ...
Operating Temperature -25 to +55°C

Storage Temperature -40 to +85°C

3.4 Battery Life
Environmental MIL-STD 810C/D/E

Frequency Stability 1200mAh Battery Capacity

12.5 kHz ppm ±1.00
25 kHz ppm ±1.35 Medium Ultra-High

VHF (5-5-90) 5 Watt* 8 hrs 8 hrs

3.2 Receiver *Typical Values

12.5kHz 20/25kHz

Sensitivity*
12dB SINAD (emf) µV 0.35µV 0.35µV
20dB SINAD (emf) µV 0.5µV 0.5µV Note: Self Quieting Frequencies
Audio Output Power
Self-quieting frequencies are frequencies
<5% distortion @1kHz 500 mW 500 mW
that are also generated by the radio and
with rated audio output
cause internal interference. On these
Spurious / Image 70 dB 70 dB frequencies the interference caused by the
Rejection self-quieter spur is great enough that a
radio will not meet its receiver sensitivity
Selectivity 60 dB 60 dB
specification.
Intermodulation 65 dB 65 dB
The frequencies are:
Switching Bandwidth 28 MHz 151.2, and 168.0MHz
No degradation ....... ..... .

6B.1-2 Model Chart and Technical Specifications

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6B.2
Radio Tuning Procedure
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 GP600 Radio Tuning .................................................................................. 1
1.1 General ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Transmitter Power ....................................................................................... 2
1.3 Reference Oscillator .................................................................................... 3
1.4 Rated Volume .............................................................................................. 3
1.5 Squelch Attenuation..................................................................................... 4
1.6 Transmit Deviation Balance (Compensation) .............................................. 4
1.7 Transmit Deviation Limit .............................................................................. 5
1.8 RSSI ............................................................................................................ 5
1.9 MPT1327 Transmit Deviation / DTMF Transmit Deviation .......................... 6

Radio Tuning Procedure 6B.2-i

Table of Contents

6B.2-ii Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.0 GP600 Radio Tuning

6B.2

1.1 General

The recommended hardware platform is a 386 or 486 DX 33 PC (personal computer) with 8 Mbytes
RAM, MsDOS 3.3, Windows 3.1 or later, and DPS (Dealer Programming Software). These are
required to align the radio. Refer to the DPS Installation Manual (section 2 of the Product Manual) for
installation and setup procedures for the required software; the user manual is accessed (and can
be printed if required) via the DPS.

To perform the alignment procedures, the radio must be connected to the PC, RIB (Radio Interface
Box), and Universal Test Set as shown in figure 2-1.
SERVICE MONITOR
30 dB PAD OR COUNTER
TRANSMIT

30 dB PAD WATTMETER

BNC
RF GENERATOR
SMA-BNC RECEIVE
58-80348B33

SET TO APPROX. 450mV FOR TX

AUDIO IN TX
BATTERY TEST SET AUDIO GENERATOR
ELIMINATOR RTX-4005B
RLN-1014A RX
SINAD METER
RADIO TEST CABLE
RKN4034
AC VOLTMETER

MEASURE 80mV FOR TX

PROGRAM/TEST CABLE
HKN9857

COMPUTER

RIB DATA
HLN9214 BUSY
GND

COMPUTER INTERFACE CABLE

HKN9216

RIB POWER SUPPLY

HSN9412 (110 VAC.)/
0180358A56 (220 VAC.)

Figure 2-1 Radio Alignment Test Setup.

All tuning procedures are performed from the Service menu.

Before going into the Service menu, the radio must first be read using the File / Read Radio menu (if
the radio has just been programmed with data loaded from disk or from a newly created codeplug,
then it must still be read so that the DPS will have the radio’s actual tuning values).

All Service windows read and program the radio codeplug directly; you do NOT have to use the DPS
Read Radio / Write Radio functions to program new tuning values.

CAUTION: DO NOT switch radios in the middle of any Service procedure. Always use
the Program or Cancel key to close the tuning window before disconnect-
ing the radio. Improper exits from the Service window may leave the radio
in an improperly configured state and result in seriously degraded radio or
system performance.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6B.2-1

GP600 Radio Tuning

The Service windows introduce the concept of the “Softpot”, an analog SOFTware controlled
POTentiometer used for adjusting all transceiver alignment controls. A softpot can be selected by
clicking with the mouse at the value or the slider or by hitting the TAB key until the value or the slider
is highlighted.

Each Service window provides the capability to increase or decrease the ‘softpot’ value with the
mouse, the arrow keys or by entering a value with the keyboard. The window displays the minimum,
maximum, and step value of the softpot. In addition transmitter tuning windows indicate the
transmitter frequency and whether the radio is keyed.

Adjusting the softpot value sends information to the radio to increase (or decrease) a DC voltage in
the corresponding circuit. For example, increasing the value in the Reference Oscillator tune window
instructs the radio microprocessor to increases the voltage across a varactor in the reference
oscillator to increase the frequency. Pressing the Program button stores all the softpot values of the
current window permanently in the radio.

In ALL cases, the softpot value is just a relative number corresponding to a D/A (Digital-to-Analog)
generated voltage in the radio. All standard measurement procedures and test equipment are
similar to previous radios.

Refer to the DPS on-line help for information on the tuning software. Perform the following
procedures in the sequence indicated.

Note: All tuning procedures must be performed at a supply voltage of 7.5V unless
otherwise stated.

1.2 Transmitter Power

The radio requires two power level settings, a high power level setting, and a low power level setting.
To set the transmitter power, either to high or low setting, follow the procedures below:

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Transmit Low Power for low power tuning and select Transmit High Power for high power
tuning. In each case, the window will indicate 7 transmitter test frequencies for fine tune and
one for coarse tune.
3. Select the first test frequency of fine tune.
4. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
5. Measure the transmitter power on your power meter.
6. Vary the value of the selected slider (or by entering value in the box) until you get the desired
power.
7. Once you get the desired power, press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
8. Repeat steps 4-7 for all test frequencies shown in the window.
9. Press Program to store the softport values.

6B.2-2 Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.3 Reference Oscillator

Adjustment of the reference oscillator is critical for proper radio operation. Improper adjustment will
not only result in poor operation, but also a misaligned radio that will interfere with other users
operating on the adjacent channels. For this reason, the reference oscillator should be checked
every time the radio is serviced. The frequency counter used for this procedure must have a stability
of 0.1 ppm (or better).

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Reference Oscillator to open the reference oscillator tuning window.
3. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
4. Measure the transmit frequency on your frequency counter.
5. Adjust the reference oscillator per the targets shown in table 2-1.
6. Press Toggle PTT again to dekey the radio and then press Program to store the softpot value..

Table 2-1 Reference Oscillator Alignment

RF-Band Target

VHF ±150 Hz

1.4 Rated Volume

The rated volume softpot sets the volume at normal test modulation.

1. Use test box (RTX4005) and set SW1 switch to speaker. Connect an AC voltmeter to the test
box meter port.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select Rated Volume to open the rated volume tuning window. The screen will indicate the
receive test frequency to be used.
4. Set the RF test generator to the receive test frequency and apply -47 dBm RF carrier frequency
with a 1 kHz tone at 60 % rated deviation. The 1 kHz tone must be audible to make sure the
radio is receiving.
5. Adjust the value of the obtained rated audio volume ( as close as 2.7 Vrms)
6. Press Program to store the softpot value.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6B.2-3

GP600 Radio Tuning

1.5 Squelch Attenuation

The squelch softpots set the signal to noise ratio at which the squelch opens. The squelch value
needs to be set at 7 frequencies across the frequency range.

1. Use test box (RTX4005), connect a SINAD meter to the “METER” port.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select Squelch Attenuation to open the squelch attenuation tuning window. The window will
indicate the receive test frequencies to be used.
4. Select the first test frequency shown, and set the corresponding value to 0.
5. Set the RF test generator to the test frequency, offset it with +500 Hz., and modulate it at 60 %
deviation with 1 kHz tone. Adjust the generator for a 18 dB SINAD level (weighted with
psophometric filter).
6. Adjust the softpot value until the squelch just closes.
7. Monitor for squelch chatter; if chatter is present, repeat step 6.
8. When no chatter is detected, select the next softpot and repeat steps 5 -7 for all test
frequencies shown in the window.
9. Press Program to store the softpot values.

1.6 Transmit Deviation Balance (Compensation)

Compensation alignment balances the modulation sensitivity of the VCO and reference modulation
(synthesizer low frequency port) lines. Compensation algorithm is critical to the operation of
signalling schemes that have very low frequency components (e.g. DPL) and could result in
distorted waveforms if improperly adjusted. The compensation value needs to be set at 7
frequencies across the frequency range.

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Modulation Attenuation to open the deviation balance tuning window. The window will
indicate the transmit test frequencies to be used.
3. Use the Test Box (RTX4005) and inject a 80 Hz tone at 100 mVrms into the “Audio In” port.
Connect an AC meter to the meter port to insure the proper input signal level.
4. Select the first test frequency shown in the window.
5. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
6. Measure the transmitter deviation.
7. Change the input tone to 3 kHz, 100 mVrms.
8. Measure again the transmitter deviation.
9. Adjust this deviation to within +/- 2 % of the value recorded earlier in step 6.
10. Check the deviation at 80 Hz again and repeat step 7, if it has changed since step 6.
11. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
12. Repeat steps 3-10 for the remaining test frequencies.
13. Press Program to store the softpot values.

Note: The step size change for step 8 is approximately 2.5% softpot value.

6B.2-4 Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.7 Transmit Deviation Limit

The transmit deviation limit softpot sets the maximum deviation of the carrier. The deviation value
needs to be set at 7 frequencies across the frequency range.

1. From the Service menu, Select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Reference Attenuation to open the reference attenuation tuning window.
3. Set the maximum value and press Program to store the softpot value.
4. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.
5. Select VCO Attenuation to open the deviation limit tuning window. The window will indicate the
transmit test frequencies to be used.
6. Use Test Box (RTX4005) and inject a 1 kHz tone at 80 mVrms into the “Audio In” port. Connect
an AC meter to the meter port to insure the proper input signal level.
7. Select the first test frequency shown in the window.
8. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
9. Adjust the transmitter deviation to the value shown in table 2-2.
10. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
11. Repeat steps 8 - 10 for the remaining test frequencies.
12. Press Program to store the softpot values.

Table 2-2 Transmitter Deviation

Channel Spacing Deviation

12.5 kHz 2.2-2.3 kHz

25 kHz 4.3-4.6 kHz

1.8 RSSI
1. Use test box (RTX4005) and set the SW1 switch to SPEAKER.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select RSSI to open the RSSI tuning window. The screen will indicate the receive test
frequency to be used.
4. Set the RF test generator to the receive test frequency, and set the RF level to the value
indicated for RSSI Level 0, modulated with 1 kHz tone at 60 % deviation. The 1 kHz tone must
be audible to make sure the radio is receiving.
5. Press Program to store the softpot value for RSSI Level 0.
6. Repeat steps 4 - 5 for the remaining RSSI levels.
7. Press Cancel to close the window.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6B.2-5

GP600 Radio Tuning

1.9 MPT1327 Transmit Deviation / DTMF Transmit Deviation

The MPT1327 Deviation Softpot is used to tune the FFSK signalling deviation. Tuning is performed
at one frequency. The radio generates an alternating bit pattern for tuning. Values for others
frequencies are calculated by the radio software.

The DTMF Deviation Softpot is used to tune the DTMF signalling deviation. Tuning is performed at
one frequency. The radio generates a DTMF signal for tuning. Values for other frequencies are
calculated by the radio software.

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Signalling Deviation to open the signalling deviation tuning window.
3. Select the MPT value and press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that
the radio is transmitting.
4. Adjust the transmitter deviation to the value shown in table 2-3.
5. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for DTMF deviation.
7. Press Program to store the softpot value.

Table 2-3 Signalling Deviation

Channel Spacing MPT 1327 Deviation

12.5 kHz 1.4-1.6 kHz 1.5-1.8 kHz

25 kHz 2.8-3.2 kHz 3.0-3.4 kHz

6B.2-6 Radio Tuning Procedure

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6B.3
Theory of Operation
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview..................................................................................................... 1

2.0 RF Section .................................................................................................. 1

2.1 Receiver....................................................................................................... 1
2.2 Transmitter................................................................................................... 3

3.0 Frequency Generation Circuitry ............................................................... 5

3.1 Synthesizer .................................................................................................. 5
3.2 VCO ............................................................................................................. 6

4.0 Controller.................................................................................................... 8
4.1 Functions ..................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Normal Operation ........................................................................................ 9
4.3 Clock Synthesizer ........................................................................................ 9
4.4 Bus Operation.............................................................................................. 9
4.5 RAM............................................................................................................. 9
4.6 EEPROM ................................................................................................... 10
4.7 SPI Interface .............................................................................................. 10
4.8 LED Control ............................................................................................... 10
4.9 Audio & Data Circuitry ............................................................................... 10
4.10 External PTT Sense Circuits...................................................................... 11
4.11 MIC Amplifier ............................................................................................. 11
4.12 TX Data Circuits......................................................................................... 11
4.13 Sub-Audible Data (PL/DPL)....................................................................... 11
4.14 High-Speed Data ....................................................................................... 12
4.15 DTMF Data ................................................................................................ 12
4.16 MDC Data .................................................................................................. 12
4.17 RX Audio Processing and Digital Volume Control ..................................... 12

Theory of Operation 6B.3-i

Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
4.18 Audio Power Amplifier ............................................................................... 13
4.19 Audio PA Muting and Output Protection .................................................... 13
4.20 Receive Data Circuits ................................................................................ 13
4.21 Alert Tone Circuits ..................................................................................... 13

Figure
3-1 RF Block Diagram.................................................................................................................1
3-2 Receiver Block Diagram .......................................................................................................2
3-3 Transmitter Block Diagram ...................................................................................................4
3-4 Synthesizer Block Diagram...................................................................................................6
3-5 VCO Block Diagram..............................................................................................................7
3-6 Controller Block Diagram......................................................................................................9

6B.3-ii Theory of Operation

 Overview

1.0 Overview
6B.3

This section provides a detailed theory of operation for the VHF GP600 and its components:the
receiver, the transmitter, the frequency generation circuitry, the controller and audio & data circuitry.

2.0 RF Section
A block diagram of the RF section is shown in figure 3-1. The RF section of the radio is divided into
Receiver and Transmitter functions.

Antenna Mixer Sq. Atten. Out

Switch Rx. Audio
Receiver
H.Filter Front End IF IFIC Carrier Det.
Module Adapt

Ref. Oscillator

Rx. Lo

Tx. Lo FRACT_N
VCO Mod. In
RF SYNTHESISER 28
PA Pin
Conn.
Mod.
ATTN Lock Det.

Current
Sense
Vctrl Prescalar
2.1MHz
Vref Reset Spi bus
Power
Control DAC
Circuit

Tx. MIC
Spi bus Audio Int./Ext
to AMP Mic
Rx./Tx, LED Rx. Audio
in from ASFIC
Int./Ext. Audio Pa ASFIC
Speaker

From
5V
REG. Reg. 5V
Batt.

PA Enable from
ASFIC

Figure 3-1 RF Block Diagram.

2.1 Receiver

The receiver of the GP600 radios consists of 4 major blocks each: the front-end module, the double
balanced mixer, the 45.1 MHz IF and the back-end IF IC.

The GP600 front-end modules consist of three blocks of circuitry each: a pre-selector, RF amplifier
and a post-selector filter. These three items are located on a receiver module PCB that stands
perpendicular to the main radio PCB.

Theory of Operation 6B.3-1

RF Section

This module is enclosed in a shield to prevent radiation into and out of the module. It also improved
the grounding of the module by soldering the module shield to the main RF Board. All filters on the
VHF modules are fixed tuned designs to eliminate the need for factory tuning and to provide wide-
band operation.

“5R” (5V)

1st RF 2nd
Bandpass Bandpass
Filter Amp Filter

Receiver Front-end Module Lo+6dBm

“5R” (5V)
Detected Audio

1st IF 2nd
Crystal Crystal IF IC
Filter Amp Filter

Figure 3-2 Receiver Block Diagram.

The shunt coupled resonator topology yields a more symmetrical frequency response to guard
against strong out of band signals that could produce IM products.

The worst case image frequency for this VHF band is 90.2 MHz above the filter passband. The 3 dB
bandwidth is approximately 35 MHz centred at 160 MHz. The centre of the band insertion loss is
approximately 1.9 dB. The 4-pole filter is designed to operate with 50 ohm input termination, while
the output termination is the input impedance of the RF amplifier that follows it.

The pre-selector filter is a 4-pole, 0.01 dB Chebyshev bandpass design implemented in a shunt
coupled resonator topology. This topology maximizes the attenuation at the worst case image
frequency for UHF band which is 90.2 MHz below the filter passband. The 3 dB bandwidth is
approximately 52 MHz. The centre of the band insertion loss is approximately 3.5 dB. The 4-pole
filter is designed to operate with a 50 ohm input termination, while the output termination is the input
impedance of the RF amplifier that follows it.

The RF amplifier, Q1, is a Motorola MMBR951, NPN device biased in a common emitter
configuration. The amp is stabilized by the shunt feedBack resistor R3, and has approximately 20 dB
of gain with a noise figure of about 3.0 dB (VHF). The amplifier draws 4.9mA of current and is
supplied by the receiver 5 volt supply (indicated as “5R” on the schematics and block diagrams).

Terminating the RF amplifier is the post-selector filter. This filter is the same as the prefilter. The filter
is designed to be terminated with the amplifier output impedance on one side, and 50 ohms on the
other.

The net gain from the receiver module is about 12.5 dB in the centre of the band and about 11.5 dB
at the band edges. The net centre of the band noise figure is approximately 5.5 dB. This is sufficient
to achieve a typical centre of the band sensitivity of 12 dBs.

6B.3-2 Theory of Operation

 RF Section

The double balanced mixer is composed of the two baluns, T1 and T2, and the ring diode IC, CR2.
The mixer operates with an LO level of +6 dBm and the conversion loss is approximately 7.5 dB. The
double balanced type mixer provides excellent isolation between any two ports. And since a dBm
can operate over a large bandwidth, the same mixer can be used for VHF radios. The dBm also
provides excellent protection against receiver spurs due to non-linearizes, such as IM and Half-IF.
The received signal mixes down to the frequency of the first IF, 45.1 MHz, and enters the IF circuitry.

2.1.1 Intermediate Frequency (IF)

The Intermediate Frequency (IF) section of the portable radio consists of several sections including,
the high IF, the second LO, the second IF, and the IF IC chip. The first LO signal and the RF signal
mix to the IF frequency of 45.1 MHz, and then enters the IF portion of the radio.

The signal first enters the high IF, passes through a crystal filter, is then amplified by the IF amp, and
then passed through another crystal filter. The first crystal filter provides selectivity, second image
protection, and intermodulation protection. The amplifier provides approximately 16 dB of gain to the
signal. The signal then passes through the second crystal filter which provides further selectivity and
second image protection. The high IF has an approximate 3 dB bandwidth of 7 kHz for 20/25/30 kHz
models and 4 kHz for 12.5kHz models.

The filtered and amplified IF signal then mixes with the second local oscillator at 44.645 MHz. The
second LO uses an amplifier internal to the IF IC, an external crystal and some external chip parts.
The oscillator presents an approximate level of -15 dBm to the second IF mixer, internal to the IF IC.

The output of the mixing of the IF signal and the second LO produces a signal at 455kHz (second
IF). This signal is then filtered by external ceramic filters and amplified. It is then passed back to the
IF IC, sent to a phase-lock detector, and demodulated. The resulting detected audio output is then
sent to the ASFIC to recover the audio.

The IF IC also controls the squelch characteristics of the radio. With a few external parts the squelch
tail, hysteresis, attack and delay were optimized for the radio. The ASFIC allows the radio’s squelch
opening to be electronically adjusted.

2.2 Transmitter

The GP600 transmitters contain five basic circuits: a power amplifier, an antenna switch, a harmonic
filter, an antenna matching network, and a power control. Refer to the block diagram and the
schematic for more information.

The power amplifier used for transmitters is the LD-MOS module. The LD-MOS is capable of
supplying an output power at 6.8W with an input signal of 2mW and a supply voltage of 7.3V. The
power out can be varied by changing the biasing voltage at the first stage.

The antenna switch circuit consists of two PIN diodes (CR101and CR102), a pi network (C119,
L112, and part of C112), and at least one current limiting resistor (R102, R103 and R108 for VHF).
In the transmit mode, TX B+ is applied to the circuit to bias the diodes “on”. The shunt diode (CR102)
shorts out the receiver port, and the pi network, which operates as a quarter wave transmission line,
transforms the low impedance of the shunt diode to a high impedance at the input of the harmonic
filter. In the receive mode, the diodes are both off, and hence, there exists a low attenuation path
between the antenna and receiver ports.

Theory of Operation 6B.3-3

RF Section

PTT

0dBm Power Antenna Harmonic Antenna

Module Switch Filter Match
From *
VCO
Buffer
VC
To Receiver 50 ohms

Power µP Serial
Ip R101 Control *Note: Connection to 50 ohms
Bus
can only be made by removing
antenna and screwing in its
Sw B+ place special BNC-to-Phono
adapter (5880166s01).

Figure 3-3 Transmitter Block Diagram.

The harmonic filter consists of part of C112, and L107, C113, L108, C114, L109, and C115. The
design of the harmonic filter for VHF is that of a Zolotarev design. This particular design is similar to
that of a Chebyshev filter except for a large amplitude first ripple (near dc). This type of filter has the
advantage that it can give greater attenuation in the stop-band for a given ripple level.

Another feature of this type of filter is that the coils tend to be smaller than with a Chebyshev design.
The design of the VHF filter was modified from the Zolotarev design by slightly changing its
capacitor values to yield a filter having an input impedance which optimized the efficiency of the
power module.

To optimize the performance of the transmitter and receiver into an antenna, a network is used to
match the antenna’s impedance to the harmonic filter. For VHF the network consists of C117, L111
and C122. Note that, in order to measure the power out of the transmitter, one must remove the
antenna and screw in its place a special BNC-to-Phono adapter.

The power control circuit consists of the networks associated with U151, Q156, Q151, Q152, Q155,
and U152. The Op Amp U151A-1 and Q156, along with resistor R101, make up a current-to-voltage
amplifier whose gain is mainly dependent upon the ratio of R179 to R153. The current to the final
stage of the power module is supplied through R101 (0.1 ohms), which provides a voltage
proportional to the current drain. This voltage is amplified and applied to the input of U151B. The
resistors at the input of U151A-1 (R151, R152, R154, and R155) keep the voltages at the inputs of
U151A-1 below its maximum allowable. These resistors are 1% tolerance parts to minimize the error
produced at the emitter of Q156 resulting from the voltage offset at the input of U151A-1.

The voltage at the other input of the summing amp, U151A-2, is supplied from two DACs contained
within U152. These DACs are controlled by the microprocessor, and provide the reference voltage
for the control loop. One of the DACs, that connected to Pin 9 of U152, provides a coarse tune
voltage, while the other provides a fine tune voltage.

Since the output of the DACs is not zero when they are set to their lowest level, resistor R169 is
provided to bias up the minus input of the summing amp to compensate for the bias resulting from
the DACs.

6B.3-4 Theory of Operation

 RF Section

The error voltage at the input of U151A-2 produces a voltage at its output, which is in turn applied to
the series pass transistor, Q152, through its driver, Q151. The voltage at the collector of Q152 is
applied to the controlled stage of the power module, which for VHF is the module’s second stage.
The feedback from the collector of Q152 to the emitter of Q151 through R166 is provided to keep the
two stages stable. Likewise, the feedback from the collector of Q152 to the minus input of the
summing amp is to keep the whole control loop stable.

The purpose of Q155 and its associated circuitry is to keep the control voltage on the module below
7.0 Volts, which is the maximum allowed for the VHF module.

The purpose of R173 was originally that of providing compensation to the control loop for changes in
the supply voltage, TX B+. However, experimentation has shown that this compensation is not really
required. Also, thermistor, R170, was provided to enable the shut back of the PA in the event that it
would get too hot. This has also been shown to not be required

Theory of Operation 6B.3-5

Frequency Generation Circuitry

3.0 Frequency Generation Circuitry

The frequency generation circuitry is composed of two main IC’s, the Fractional-N synthesizer
(U201) and the VCO/Buffer IC (U251). Designed in conjunction to maximize compatibility, the two
IC’s provide many of the functions which normally would require additional circuitry. The block
diagram illustrates the interconnect and support circuitry used in the design. Refer to the schematic
for reference designator.

The supply for the synthesizer is from regulated 5 Volts which also serves the rest of the radio. The
synthesizer in turn generates a superfiltered 5 Volts (*actually 4.65 Volts) which powers U251.

In addition to the VCO, the synthesizer must interface with the logic and ASFIC circuitry.
Programming for the synthesizer is accomplished through the data, clock, and chip enable lines
(pins 1, 2, and 35) from the microprocessor, U709. A serial stream of 98 bits is sent whenever the
synthesizer is programmed. A 5 volt dc signal from pin 2 indicates to the microprocessor that the
synthesizer is locked while unlock is indicated by a low voltage on this pin. Transmit modulation from
the ASFIC is applied to pin 8 of U201. Internally the audio is digitized by the Fractional-N and
applied to the loop divider to provide the low-port modulation. The audio is also run through an
internal attenuator for modulation balancing purposes before being output at pin 28 to the VCO. A
2.1 MHz clock for the AFIC is generated by the Fractional-N and is routed to pin 9 where it is filtered
and attenuated from 2.5 Volts to approximately 2 Volts.

3.1 Synthesizer

The Fractional-N synthesizer uses a 16.8 MHz crystal (Y201) to provide the reference frequency for
the system. The other reference oscillator components external to the IC are C205, C206, R207,
and CR203. The 16.8 MHz signal is divided down signal from the VCO. The loop filter, comprised of
R201, R202, R205, C201, C214, C215, and C216, provides the necessary d.c. steering voltage for
the VCO as well as filtering of spurious signals from the phase detector.

Data (5) 5
(U201) 2 Lock Det (to µP U709)
Clock (6) 6 FRACTIONAL_N
SYNTHESIZER 11 Mod out (to ASFIC U701)
Cex (7) 7
28 Mod out (to VCO modulation)
Mod In (8) 8
Reg 5V 12,19,22,23,3
lout
GND (4,21,13,30) 4,21,13,30 29 2-Pole
Prescalar In ladapt Loop Filter
20 31
Crystal 1
14
Crystal 2 AUX3 Steering line
Reference
15 TRB 5
Oscillator Voltage
cp bias 1 1
27 Controlled
Filtered 5V Oscillator
26 18
cp bias 2 (U251)
32
VCP 10 9 16 23 4 2
Rx injection
Voltage V-mult 1 Warp
Multiplier V-mult 2 Tx injection

Figure 3-4 Synthesizer Block Diagram.

6B.3-6 Theory of Operation

 Frequency Generation Circuitry

For achieving fast locking of the synthesizer, an internal adapt charge pump provides higher current
capability at pin 31 than when in the normal steady-state mode. Both the normal and adapt charge
pumps receive their supply from the voltage multiplier which is made up of C202, C203, C204,
C231, CR201, and CR202. By combining two 5 Volt square waves which are 180 out-of-phase along
with Regulated 5 Volts, a supply of approximately 12.6 Volts is available at pin 32 for the charge
pumps. The current for the normal mode charge pumps is set by R203. The pre-scaler for the loop is
internal to U201 with the value determined by the frequency band of operation.

3.2 VCO

The VCO (U251) in conjunction with the Fractional-N synthesizer (U201) generates rf in both the
receive and the transmit modes of operation. The TRB line (U251 pin 5) determines which oscillator
and buffer will be enabled. A sample of the rf signal from the enabled oscillator is routed from U251
pin 23, through a low pass filter, to the pre-scaler input (U201 pin 20). After frequency comparison in
the synthesizer, a resultant CONTROL VOLTAGE is received at the VCO. This voltage is a DC
voltage between 3 and 10 volts when the PLL is locked on frequency.

Lo Rf
Injection Low 10,11 Rx
Pass 2 Rx Rx Tank
Filter Buffer Osc Control
Voltage
Tx Rf
Injection Low 4 Tx
Tx Tx 15,16
Pass Tank
Attenuator Filter Buffer Osc
Filter

Audio
Tx/Rx/BS 5 Tx VCO In
Prescalar Switching TRB Mod
Buffer Network

AUX 3 (U201 pin 1)

VC GND VCC
23 13 1,20 3
Filter 5V (U201 pin 18)

Low
Prescalar RF out Pass Pre-In (U201 pin 20)
Filter

Figure 3-5 VCO Block Diagram.

In the receive mode, U251 pin 5 is grounded. This activates the receive VCO by enabling the receive
oscillator and the receive buffer of U251. The rf signal at U251 pin 2 is run through a low pass filter.
The rf signal after the low pass filter is the LO RF INJECTION and it is applied to the first mixer at
T2.

Theory of Operation 6B.3-7

Frequency Generation Circuitry

During the transmit condition, PTT depressed, five volts is applied to U251 pin 5. This activates the
transmit VCO by enabling the transmit oscillator and the transmit buffer of U251. The rf signal at
U251 pin 4 is run through a low pass filter and an attenuator to give the correct drive level to the
input of the PA module (U101 pin 1). This rf signal is the TX RF INJECTION. Also in transmit mode,
the audio signal to be frequency modulated onto the carrier is received by the transmit VCO
modulation circuitry at AUDIO IN.

When a high impedance is applied to U251 pin 5, the VCO is operating in BATTERY SAVER mode.
In this case, both the receive and transmit oscillators as well as the receive, transmit, and pre-scaler
buffer are turned off. In the Fractional-N, the battery saver mode places the A/D and the modulation
attenuator in the off state. This mode is used to reduce current drain on the radio.

6B.3-8 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.0 Controller
The GP600 controller is an open architecture which consists of:
■ U709, Motorola 68HC11K1 microprocessor
■ U701, Audio Signalling Filter Integrated Circuit, ASFIC
■ U703, 1KByte EEPROM
■ U705, 128/256KByte OTP/FLASH ROM
■ U706, 8/32KByte Static RAM
■ U707, LCD Display Driver and
■ U704, 5V Voltage Regulator

U709, U703, U705, U706 and U707 are powered by U704. U701 is powered from a 5V Regulator
(U708) on Radio Module. In addition to the external memory devices, U709 has 768 bytes of RAM
and 640 bytes of EEPROM.

Reset

Tx. Limiter Ref

Carrier Tx. Attn Display
Filter and
Detect Audio & Splatter Driver
Pre-emp
Adapt VCO
Tone Attn To
Rx. Gen Synth
Audio Mod.In

Rx. Filter
Σ
2.1 Vol
Micro- MHz & De-emp
28 Attn Rx.
processor
Pin Sq. Audio
Conn. Out LCD
Attn
In

Data, Address
7.9488 and Control
MHz Clk
Keypad
Lock EE-
Detect PROM

Low Batt.
Monitor ROM/ RAM
SPI Bus FLASH
Vol
Sense
LED
5V From
5V Reg. Batt.

Push Channel
Button Switch
Reset

Figure 3-6 Controller Block Diagram.

Theory of Operation 6B.3-9

Controller

4.1 Functions

The microprocessor has two basic functions: interfacing with the outside world and controlling the
internal workings of the radio. The microprocessor interfaces directly with the keypad, side buttons,
PTT, rotary switch, battery low indicator, EXT PTT and volume sense. The microprocessor
constantly monitors these inputs and interprets any changes into commands that control the rest of
the radio. Some control functions it performs include loading the synthesizer with the desired RF
frequency, turning the RF PA on or off, enabling and disabling audio and data paths and generating
tones. Operations and operating conditions within the radio are interpreted by the microprocessor
and fed back to the operator as visible (the display) or audible (alert tone) indications of current
status.

4.2 Normal Operation

The regulated 5V output from U704 powers the microprocessor (U709) and the rest of the digital IC
except ASFIC (U701). The microprocessor’s clock is generated by the ASFIC, which has a built-in
programmable clock synthesizer.

4.3 Clock Synthesizer

Upon power-up and assuming that the ASFIC receives a proper 2.1MHz input on U701-P38 (which
comes from the transceiver board), the ASFIC outputs a 7.9488MHz CMOS square wave (0-5Vpp
logic) on U701-P30, which connects to the EXTAL input of the microprocessor, U709-P73. The
microprocessor operates at 1/4 of this frequency, which in this case computes to 1.9872MHz. In
particular, the E clock output (U709-P72) will be a 50% duty cycle square wave at this frequency.

4.4 Bus Operation

The microprocessor operates in expanded memory mode and executes firmware contained in OTP/
FLASH ROM, U705. The microprocessor uses a non-multiplexed address data bus, consisting data
lines D0 through D7 and address lines A0-A17. In addition, the microprocessor has integrated chip-
select logic so that external memories can be accessed without the need for external address
decoder gates. These chip-select signals are provided by U709-P28 and P29.

When the controller board is functioning normally, microprocessor’s address and data lines should
be toggling at CMOS logic levels. Specifically, the logic-high levels should be between 4.8 and 5.0V,
and the logic-low levels should be between 0 and 0.2V.

4.5 RAM

The on-chip 768 byte static RAM from U709 provides some scratch-pad memory, with the bulk of it
coming from the external 8 or 32Kbyte SRAM, U706. External SRAM accesses are indicated by the
U709-P28. Normally SRAM is accessed less often than the OTP/FLASH ROM, U705; i.e. the
number of transitions per second on U705 chip select (pin 30) should be 5-15 times higher than
those on U706 pin 20.

6B.3-10 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.6 EEPROM

The radio codeplug storage is provided by U709 internal 640 byte EEPROM, with an additional
1Kbyte of memory space provided by external EEPROM, U703. There are three basic types of
codeplug information: information on the trunked system on which the radio is authorized to operate;
information on the conventional system, which is either of the repeater or talk-around type on which
the radio is authorized to operate, and information on the configuration and tuning of the radio itself.
Tuning information is normally located in the internal EEPROM of U709.

4.7 SPI Interface

The microprocessor communicates to several ICs and modules through a dedicated on-chip serial-
peripheral-interface (SPI) port which consists of transmit data line MOSI (U709-P1), receive data
line MISO (U709-P80), and clock line SCK (U709-P2). In addition, each IC that can be accessed by
the microprocessor using the SPI has a read/write select line associated with it. The ICs or circuits
and their associated select lines are:
■ EEPROM (U703) with select line U709-P3
■ ASFIC (U701) with select line U709-P34
■ LCD Driver (U707) with select line U709-P23
■ SRAM (U706) and OTP/FLASH ROM (U705) with select line U709-P33
■ Transceiver board Synthesizer (U201) with select line U709-P35
■ Transceiver board DAC IC (U152) with select line U709-P26

The LCD Driver uses the master out/slave in (MOSI) line to send data to the display driver IC, and
the master in/slave out (MISO) line to send data back to the microprocessor (U709). Note, however,
that the keypad (or any other SPI device) can never initiate display data; the microprocessor is at all
times the SPI master device. Thus the MOSI line and MISO line are always in the master
configuration.

4.8 LED Control

The bi-colour LED on the top of the radio is indirectly activated by SPI of U709 via the DAC IC
(U152) on Transceiver Board. When either input to the dual NPN transistor (U410) is at logic high,
the corresponding output pin (pin 6 for the green LED, pin 3 for the red) should be at approximately
4.3 Vdc. Note that it is possible to have both LED outputs on simultaneously, in which case the LED
emits a yellow/orange light.

4.9 Audio & Data Circuitry

The transmit and receive audio paths are disabled in the standby mode and selectively enabled by
the microprocessor when the radio transmits or receives a signal. Also, there are minor differences
in the functioning of both paths depending on whether an internal or external (accessory)
microphone/speaker is being used. The radio constantly monitors the received data path for control-
channel data in trunking operation or sub-audible data in conventional operation.

Theory of Operation 6B.3-11

Controller

4.10 External PTT Sense Circuits

On connecting an external MIC through connector J3, external PTT sense transistor Q408 switches
“ON” when the external PTT switch is closed. Q408 collector voltage is monitored by U709-P4.
When collector voltage is logic “HIGH”, the microprocessor configures the radio for transmit mode.
In PTT equipped accessories, the PTT switch is series connected with the external MIC element.

4.11 MIC Amplifier

MIC audio from internal MIC MK401 is coupled through C429, L404, J3 and L403 to the MIC buffer
circuit U405-1. External MIC plug insertion mechanically disconnects the internal MIC. External MIC
audio is coupled through L403 to the MIC buffer input. The unity gain buffer will route the MIC audio
into MIC IN (U701-P7) through flex and connectors J200 and J700. Inside the ASFIC, the MIC audio
is amplified, filtered to eliminate components outside the 300-3000Hz voice band, pre-emphasized,
and then limited. The limited MIC audio is then routed through a summer, which is used to add in PL
or DPL sub-audio band modulation, and then to a splatter filter to eliminate high frequency spectral
components generated by the limiter. After the splatter filter, the audio is routed to the 8 bit
modulation attenuators, which are tuned in the factory of the field to set the proper amount of FM
deviation. The TX audio emerges from the ASFIC at U701-P55 is dc coupled and applied through
flex and connectors J700 and J200 to the synthesizer (U201) pin 8.

4.12 TX Data Circuits

There are four major types of transmit data: sub-audible data (PL/DPL/Connect Tone) that gets
summed with voice, high speed data for trunking control channel communication, DTMF data for
telephone communication in trunked and conventional systems, and MDC data for use in Motorola
proprietary MDC systems. The deviation levels of the latter three types are tuned by a 5-bit digital
attenuation inside the ASFIC. For each data type and each band split, there is a distinct set of tuning
values that are programmed into the ASFIC before the data is generated and transmitted.

4.13 Sub-Audible Data (PL/DPL)

Sub-audible data is composed of low-frequency PL and DPL waveforms for conventional operation
and connect tones for trunked voice channel operation. (The trunking connect tone is simply a PL
sine wave at a higher deviation level than PL in a conventional system). Although it is referred to as
“sub-audible data”, the actual frequency spectrum of these waveforms may be as high as 250Hz,
which is audible to the human ear. However, the radio receiver filters out any audio below 300Hz, so
these tones are never heard in the actual system.

Only one type of sub-audible data can be generated by U701 at any one time. The process is as
follows: using the SPI, the microprocessor programs the ASFIC (U701) to set up the proper low-
speed data deviation and select the PL or DPL filters. The microprocessor then generates a square
wave from U705-P6 which strobes the ASFIC PL_CLK (U701-P20). For encode input at twelve
times the desired data rate. (For example, for a PL frequency of 103Hz, the frequency of the square
wave at U701-P20 would be a1236Hz). This derives a tone generator inside U701, which generates
a staircase approximation to a PL sine wave or DPL data pattern. This internal waveform is then low-
pass filtered and summed with voice or data. The resulting summed waveform then appears on
U701-P55 (VCO_ATN), where it is sent to the transceiver board as previously described for transmit
audio.

6B.3-12 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.14 High-Speed Data

High-speed data refers to the 3600 baud data waveforms (ISWS AND OSWS) used in a trunking
system for high-speed communication between the radio and the central controller. To generate an
ISW, the microprocessor (U709) first programs the ASFIC (U701) to the proper filter and gain
settings. It then begins strobing U701-P54 (Trunking Clock In) with a square wave (from U709-P5) at
the same baud rate as the data. The output waveform from 5-3-2 State Encoder of U701 is then fed
to the post-limiter summer block and then the splatter filter. From that point it is routed through the
mode attenuator and then out of the ASFIC to the transceiver board via VCO_ATN (U701-P55).

4.15 DTMF Data

DTMF data is a dual-tone waveform used during phone interconnect operation. They are divided into
low-group and high-group tones. The high-group tone is generated by U709-P5 strobing U701-P54
at six times the tone frequency for tones less than 1440Hz, or twice the frequency for tones greater
than 1440Hz. The low-group tone is generated by U709-P7 strobing U701-P53 (DTMF Clock) at six
times the tone frequency. Inside U701 the low-group and high-group tones are summed (with the
amplitude of the high-group tone being approximately 2dB greater than that of the low-group tone)
and then pre-emphasized before being routed to the summer and splatter filter. The DTMF
waveform then follows the same path as was described for high speed data.

4.16 MDC Data

The MDC signal follows exactly the same path as the DTMF high-group tone. MDC data utilizes
MSK modulation, in which a logic zero is represented by one cycle of a 1200Hz sine wave, and a
logic one is 1.5 cycles of an 1800Hz sine wave. To generate the data, the microprocessor (U709)
first programs the ASFIC (U701) to the proper filter and gain settings. It then begins strobing U701-
P54 with a square wave (from U709-P5) at the same baud rate as the data. The output waveform
from U701 is fed to the post-limiter summer block and then the splatter filter. From that point it is
routed through the mode attenuator and then out of ASFIC to the transceiver board via VCO_ATN
(U701-P55).

4.17 RX Audio Processing and Digital Volume Control

The radio’s RF circuit are constantly producing an output at the Detected Audio line. Whenever the
radio is in trunked standby mode, it is processing data from the control channel; while in
conventional standby mode, it is always monitoring the squelch line and/or sub-audible data. The
detected audio from the transceiver board enters the controller board at connector J700 pin 4. In
addition to the detected audio line, the transceiver board also provides a squelch noise from U51-
P30 into the ASFIC squelch-detect circuitry via U701-P56. When the microprocessor is satisfied that
it has received the proper data or signal type for unsquelching, it sets up the receive audio path and
sends data to U701 to do the same within.

The detected audio will enter U701 through RX IN (pin 57) and PL IN (pin 63) for further processing.
Inside the IC, the signal first passes through a low-pass filter to remove any frequency components
above 3000Hz and then a high-pass filter to strip off any sub-audible data below 300Hz. Next, the
recovered audio passes through a de-emphasis filter to reduce the effects of FM noise. Finally, the
IC amplifies the audio and passes it through the 8-bit programmable attenuator whose level is set
depending on the value of the volume control. The microprocessor (U709) programs the value of the
8-bit attenuator in accordance with the voltage sensed at the volume potentiometer, which is
connected to U709-P48. This pin is one of the eight channels of U709’s 8 bit A/D convertor. After
passing through the 8-bit digital attenuator, the audio goes to a buffer amplifier and then exits at
U701-P66, where it is routed to the Audio power amplifier circuit in the transceiver board.

Theory of Operation 6B.3-13

Controller

4.18 Audio Power Amplifier

Resistor R466 sets the input impedance to U409-P2 of the audio power amp. The audio PA circuit is
a bridged-tied-load (BTL) configuration with fixed gain of 40dB, developing 500mW (rated audio
power) output at less than 5% harmonic distortion into the 16 ohm internal speaker LS401 with
nominal 7.5Vdc battery supply. Maximum audio power output is greater than 1.2 watts.

4.19 Audio PA Muting and Output Protection

PNP transistor Q410, the audio PA power switch, driven by NPN darlington transistor Q411, the PA
mute amp, controls Vcc supply to Audio PA U409-P1. U701-P5 is connected to Q411 base,
controlling audio PA Vcc supply. Resistors R489 and R490, PNP transistor Q412 and the current
sense circuit monitor current supplied to audio PA U409-P1. Worst case audio PA current (at 9Vdc
battery voltage, maximum volume and full system deviation) does not exceed 450mA at the nominal
16 ohm load. Resistor R488 and capacitor C461 provide an RC time delay for U405-2, a monostable
multivibrator circuit. A 2.5Vdc reference voltage is fed to U405-2-P6. On radio power-up, and in
normal operation U405-P7 monostable multivibrator output is logic “LO” pulling Q411 emitter to Vee
with the audio PA controlled by U701-P5. Should U409-P5 and/or U409-P8 become shorted to each
other or to the ground (Vee), current consumption exceeds 500 mA (approximately) and Q412
collector. When U405-2-P5 voltage rises higher than the U405-2-P6 reference voltage (rise time is
less than 50 usec), U405-2 is triggered and U405-2-P7 dc output voltage is switched to 4Vdc,
effectively biasing Q411 into cut-off and turning off the audio PA power switch Q410. U405-2-P7
remains in this state for 15 msec, then reset to logic “LO” state. Average power dissipation in the
audio PA circuit components is helped to a low level by the low duty cycle (less than 0.3%) of the
audio PA protection circuit. The cycle repeats until the audio PA output short is removed.

4.20 Receive Data Circuits

The ASFIC (U701) decodes all receive data, which includes PL, DPL, low-speed trunking, MDC,
and high-speed trunking data. The “decode” process for each data type typically involves low pass
or band pass filtering, signal amplification, and then routing the signal to a comparator, which
outputs a logic zero or one signal. The detected audio from the transceiver board is routed to U701-
P57 and P63 through coupling cap C435. Inside U701, the data is filtered according to the data type
(HS data or LS data, then hard-limited to a 0-5V digital level. The high-speed limited data output
(MDC and trunking high-speed) appears at U701-P51, where it connects to U709-P11. The low
speed limited data output (PL, DPL and trunking low-speed) appears at U701-P4, where it connects
to U709-P10.

4.21 Alert Tone Circuits

When the microprocessor needs to give the operator feedback (for a good key press or for a bad key
press) or radio status (trunked system busy, low battery condition, phone call, circuit failures), it
sends an alert tone to the speaker. It does so by sending data to U701, which sets up the audio path
to the speaker for alert tones. The alert tone itself can be generated in one of two ways: internally by
the ASFIC, or externally using the microprocessor and the ASFIC. The allowable internal alert tones
are 300, 900 and 1800Hz. For external alert tones, the microprocessor can generate any tone within
the 100-3000Hz audio band. This is accomplished by the microprocessor toggling the output line
U709-P7, which is also the same line used to generate low-group DTMF data. Inside the ASFIC, this
signal is routed to the external input of the alert tone generator. The output of the generator is
summed into the audio chain just after the RX audio de-emphasis block. The tone is then amplified
and filtered before passing through the 8-bit digital volume attenuator. The tone exits at U701-P66,
then is routed to the audio PA circuitry in the transceiver board.

6B.3-14 Theory of Operation

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6B.4
PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists
Table of Contents

Description Page
VHF (146-174MHz) Diagrams and Parts Lists
Controller PCB Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Controller Schematic Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
RF PCB Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
RF Overall Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
RF (Receiver Module) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
RF (Synthesizer) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
RF (Transmitter Module) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
RX-FE Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-i

Table of Contents

6B.4-ii PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists

 Controller Board

DS702 DS701

DS704 DS703
J701 1
34

32 17
15 14 33 16
R799
C721
S01 S02 S03 S04
R781 C745
U706 U707
R755 C787 C746

R700 C700

VR707
48 1
49 64 TP7

C754
R790

C781
R711
R713

C744
CR707 S13 S14 S15 S16
Q704 R710
28 1
C719
C758
R787

Q703 16 Q700
Q705 17 C720
4 R763 C777 C786
5 U705

C718
R712
R753
U703

C716
C717
8 1 TP4 32 1
C711 S07 S08 S09 S10
R726

80 61 C407 H8 B8
R403

1 60 6 4 J7 A7
U704
1 3 R786
U701
C763
C406 C765
R725

R764

U709 S05 S06 S11 S12

TP2 J2 A2
H1 B1
R754
TP1
R756
C738
C761

R751
C707

C737 C708
C731
C743

20 41 C769
21 C733 R705 C710
40
28
C741
C732

2
C747
C435

C742
R468

Q702

R752
J700
1 27

Controller Board Controller Board

Component Side 8404599J03 GEPD5478-1 Solder Side 8404599J03 Solder
GEPD5479-1
Side
Component Side

Controller Board
PCB No. 8404599J03

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-1

 Controller Schematic Diagram

Controller Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-3

 Controller Board- 8404599J03

Controller Board-
8404599J03

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

capacitor, fixed: pF +/-5%; 50V C754 2113743E20 100nF 10%

(unless otherwise stated)
C758 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C406 2113741F49 10000
C761 2113740F39 33
C407 2311049A40 TANT 2.2µF +/-10%
C763 2113741F49 10000
C435 2113743E20 100NF 10%
C765 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C700 2113743E07 22 nF
C769 2113740F55 150
C707 2113741F17 470
C777 2311049A07 TANT 1.0µF +/-10%
C708 2113741F49 10000
C781 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C710 2311049J11 TANT 4.7µF +/-10%
C786 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C711 2311049A07 TANT 1.0µF +/-10%
C787 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C716 2113743F08 0.22µF
resistor, fixed: ohm +/-5%; 1/8W
C717 2160521G37 100nF (unless otherwise stated)

C718 2113743E20 100nF 10% R403 0662057A97 100k

C719 2160521G37 100nF R468 0662057A73 10k

C720 2113741A45 10000 R700 0662057A97 100k

C721 2311049A01 0.1µF R705 0662057A89 47k

C731 2113743K15 0.1µF R710 0662057A89 47k

C732 2113743K15 0.1µF R725 0662057A93 68k

C733 2113740F55 150 R726 0662057A85 33k

C737 2113740F55 150 R751 0662057B47 0

C738 2113740F55 150 R752 0662057B47 0

C741 2113740F55 150 R753 0662057A73 10K

C742 2113740F55 150 R754 0662057B47 0

C743 2113740F55 150 R755 0662057A73 10k

C744 2113740F55 150 R756 0662057A73 10k

C745 2113740F55 150 R763 0662057A65 4700

C746 2113740F55 150 R764 0662057A73 10k

C747 2113740F55 150 R781 0662057C39 33

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-5

Controller Board- 8404599J03

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

R786 0662057A97 100K Flex, PCB:

R787 0662057A83 27K J701 8404628J02 Flex Heat Seal

R790 0662057A81 22K Non-Referenced Parts:

R799 0662057C39 33 6104617J01 Lightpipe
Connector:
7204616J01 LCD
J700 0904621J02 Connector, ZIF,
Controller 8404599J03 Pcb, Controller

Light Emitting Diode:

DS701 4805729G90 LED, green

DS702 4805729G90 LED, green

DS703 4805729G90 LED, green

DS704 4805729G90 LED, green

Diode, Transistor:

CR707 4813833C02 Diode Dual 70V '5B'

COMM CATH

Q700 4880214G02 NPN, MMBT3904

Q702 4880214G02 NPN, MMBT3904

Q703 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

Q704 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

Q705 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

VR707 4813830A27 Zener 14V 5% 225mW

Integrated Circuit:

U701 5105835U41 CC CONT 519/W52

F83G ASFIC

U703 5105462G76 EEPROM

U704 5180633C01 5V REGULATOR W/

RESET

U705 5105625U73 ROM

U706 5102463J27 RAM (32K X 8)

U707 5102463J21 MSM6606 DISPLAY

DRIVER

U709 5102226J34 MC68HC11K1CFU4

MICROPROCESSOR
(16 MHz)

6B.4-6 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board

CL6 CL7 CL8 CL11

C224 C226

C212
C227

C273
L204
L253 4 SH105 C33 L11 L53 Y51B

2
CR203

C272
Y201T 2 3 R253 5 4 6 3

C258
CF51 CF52

R54 C56

C59 C78
C29 C30
C286
C233 T2 C28

C455
L255 L260 L55 R460
L203 2

3
2 3

C217
C232 C205
C268

Y51A
R267 R254 L9 C58
L268 C279

R207
5

C206
C235 5 30
CR255 8 5 C55 R55

SH104
R205 C281 CR2
L262

C219
C790

C209
C215
L201 C257 C278 4 L52 U51

C75
R258 C266
C259 C73 J6
4 C265 L259 3 2 R51 C79

Y53
C204
12 23

C74
R64
C291 L258 L261
2 3

C269

L51
SH103 C68

C51
T1

C63
C271 L58

4
2
C270 C66 C69 R57 C67 SW401
4 5

C
8 C
C116 R105
R106 7

C117
C289 U252

C418
R104

C419
C288 C425 R447 6 5 4 3

C498
8 5
CL5

C424
R448

C485 C486
C287 U708
Q408 4 L111
C421

R169
L407 J1
R452 C452 R503 C122
R451
U709
2
L403 R170 3
4 4 C800

C461

R173
U405 L710 4

R702
C499
R488
U409 L404
5 8

6
5
4
2
5 8 C429 J2

C409
L101 C103
CL4
C430
PB403 PB401 PB402
RF Board
CL3 CL2
Component Side

VR704
R802 R410
R803 R411
R801R409
R804 R415

CR252

C57

CR405
L54
C254
C454 C789
C208

R212
C236
C207

C210 C253 C275

C211
C228

R263
C251 C456

L251

CR51

R60

C62
JU51

R52
C54

C255
R203

C284 R261
R211 R251
C457

C82 R67
C252 C476
R408 C290 L256 C77 R53 L717
C472 17 24 R204 17 C71

C60
21 22

C61

R497
16

C70
R216 C230 25 L252 16 C53
R414
R202

R424 R265 Q51 R68

C83 C64
R417 R215C223 C474

R264
C256

C31
C473 C466 U201 L267

R260 U251 C85 2 4

R206 C87
C202

C468 C467 9 C216 10 9 54

DS401

C264 C263
32
R416

C237

8
R201
C201

3
4

R413
C86
CR201 R58

R412
U410
L254

3
C203 C222 C261
C220
C221

C80
R66
L257
R257

Q405
C262

C260
C238

6
CR202

C475 C436
1 CR253

VR401
C459 C443
C214 C276 C280
J200 C231 C218 C229 SH101 C81
SH100
C158
R193

C165 C157 R438 C36

C410
C34 R162 C460
C193 C151

R167 SL R158
C168 R168 5 8 C35

R160
R494

C199 R159

C154
C159 22 4
5 U151A Q151 2 C156 C120 3

C119
21
C480
R450
R449
C426

4 1 L112 L406
C437 R469

R166

CR102 R102
U152 Q153 R161
R489 R157 C153
C469 R466 C479

9 C152 C163 2

C105
17

Q154

C113
C438 Q410 16 10 C111 C118 L405
R155 Q156

28 R490 R154 C101

Q152 C112
R172
R171C481

R108
C428

CR101

C121
J3
R156

R153
R507

R103

L107
C464 C115
R175
R496

Q412 R179Q155 R101 L108 4

C427

L102
C442 R174

L109
C114
Q411
R467 C441 C166 L106 5
CL9 R151 6
R152 C164 C167

C107
J5 L104 R107
C102 C106
1 2 3 4
RF Board
Solder Side

RF Board
PCB No. 8404880J01

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-7

 RF Schematic Diagram

BATTERY
GRAPHICS ONLY
0180702489 BATT FILTER BOARD
* CONNECTION VIA CHASSIS
R497 SCI SCI
470 refer to R460 C3
SW402-1 39
L710 SW_ONOFF CONN_BPLUS
5V SWB+ TXB+ EN_BIAS 5V SWB+ 5R THERMAL FUSE
390nH F1
U708 C421 P/O VOL
L1 L2 4A
8 1 .47uf
6
VIN VOUT
2 CHG+
7
5V_TAP SENSE
4 CR405 C1 C2 C4
C419 5 FEEDBACK GND NU 39 39
ERROR
.018uf SHUTDOWN 3
SWB+
(SOURCE) CHG-
L407 1.2uH
5V SWB+ TXB+ 5V SWB+ 5R
C418 C486 C485 J200
10uf 1000pf 1000pf CONN_89982-28
5V 1 SWB+
EN_BIAS SQATTNIN
(SOURCE) 2 GND
DETAUDIO 3 SQATTNIN
TRANSMITTER RX_IN RX_IN RECEIVER 4 DETAUDIO
RSSI 5 RSSI
RX_INJ 6 ADAPT
ADAPT 7 LOCKDET
8 SYNLE
9 MODIN
CLK RESET DACLE TX_INJ 10 SB1
11 SB2
5V 12 ROT1
13 ROT2
(SOURCE FROM ASFIC) 14 2.5V
15 5V
16 MICIN
17 SRDATA
RX_INJ 5V 18 RXAUDIO
LOCKDET 19 GCB1
C287 20 VOL
CLK RESET DACLE SYNLE 1000pf R447 21 PTT
22 EXTPTTSENSE
SB1 SB2 2.5V 5V 5V 23 SCI
MODIN NU C425
TX_INJ VOLUME 24 SRCLOCK
C424 NU 25 DACLE
DATA SRDATA PORT
SYNTHESIZER L717
VOL SENSE
26 RESET
27 GND
SRCLK NU C480 .39uH 28 2.1MHZ
CLK NU R460-2 XX
XX VR704
R448 R450 C789
SW_ 100pf 6.8V
2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ
0 ONOFF XX C288 C289
NU
U405-1 NU NU

DACLE

RESET
PTT

2.1MHZ
DATA

CLK
OPAMP_4PIN
2 N2 C426 C427
SWB+ 1 .22uf
.22uf L403
R507 R489 R490 N1 3 N3
1000 2.7 2.7 4 MMBT3906 390nH J3
1/8W 1/8W R451 C481 S2XX EXT_MIC-SPKR
SWB+ N4 Q408 2200 150pf
2 R449 C428
100K 470pf R494 3 S3XX
Q412 100K EXT MIC
MMBT3906 2 2 S1XX
1 C438 MIC FILTER
C461 4.7uf 1 C410
3 3 2.5V VR401 J5
R452 150pf C409 C436 CONN_4PIN
1 150pf 10V 470pf 1
.1uf C464 R503 180K MK401
3 INT MIC
R488 Q410 1
Q411 5V 2
220K 8 .1uf M41L03 MMBTA13 330 C452 L404
5 N4 2 C498 4.7uf
N3 R496 390nH
7 1000pf
SHIELDS AND BUTTERFLY CLIPS N1
6 330 C429
N2 U405-2 4700pf 3
2.5V L405 LS401
OPAMP_4PIN R702 INT SPKR
390nH EN_BIAS 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 ohm
AUDIO AMPLIFIER 2000 C430 C442
CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL R467 C499 470pf J4
U409 10 1000pf 1000pf
CL11 CL9 CL8 CL7 CL6 CL5 CL4 CL3 CL2 TDA7052 S2XX EXT_MIC-SPKR
R469 1 5 C441 S3XX
Vp OUTPUT1 EXT SPKR
C437 .1uf L406
1800 2 INPUT 8 S1XX
OUTPUT2

GND0
GND1
390nH

NC1
NC0
.47uf C469 C443
SH101 SH100 SH103 SH104 SH105 R466 C479
47pf 4700 470pf 3 6 1000pf
SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 4 7
NC NC
1 1 1 1 1
5V
ROT1
ROT2
R801 R802 R803 R804 R409 43K
SW_FREQ_16POS 10K 10K 10K 10K
SB1 SB2 PTT SW401 PC3 8 R408 20K
PC2 4
C466 C467 C468 PC1 2 R411 43K
PC0 1
1000pf 1000pf 1000pf C0 C1 C460 C475 C459 C474 C456 C454 C457 C455 R410 20K
.1uf .1uf .1uf .1uf
R416 1000pf 1000pf 1000pf 1000pf
R415 R417
100 100 100 R414 R415
C476 C472 510K 510K
C473 1000pf
1000pf 1000pf
SW_TACTILE

SW_TACTILE
SW_TACTILE

1 2 1 2 2 1
PB401 PB402 PB403
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF OVERALL CIRCUITS
MON OPT2 PTT VHF (146-174MHz)
GEPD5564

RF Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-9

 RF Schematic Diagram

FIRST MIXER L52

C34 C31
.47uH

.01uf 1000pf
2
1,2 1 T2 Y51A
3 4
5V 5,6 45.1MHZ
FRONT END RECEIVER MODULE U252 6 8 2 INSTPAR
XFMR C30 R51 L51
MODRF_6PIN VOLT 1000pf 1 3
CR2-1 1 5 .15uH C53 L53 C77
51
1 2 3 4 5 6 C35 L9 22pf 1.2uH 3pf
T1 L11
4 3 C51 2
CR2-2
RX_IN VOLT 68nH 22nH
82pf C36 2
7,8 C33 C28 C29 82pf
NU 5 7
6.8pf 51pf 51pf
5 1

XFMR 4
3,4
RX_INJ

C790 1000pf
4F(N) 6F(N)
R55 4D(W) 4E(W)
C55 .1uf 455KHZ
5R 455KHZ
100 FILTER FILTER_6POLE
R54
2000 1 3 1 5

2.5VDC

2.5VDC
R52

C61
33K 2

3.8VDC
CF51 CF52
C82 INSTPAR 2 3 4 INSTPAR
R67 1500pf
2.9VDC JU51 CR51
4 3 36 35 33 32
.1uf 6800

FIL_CAP_OUT
2ND_IF_OUT

IF_AMP_OUT

LIM_IN

FIL_CAP_IN
IF_AMP_IN
C56 NU
3 Q51 JUMPER
20pf Y51B C59
NPN C78 0.75VDC
C54 INSTPAR 6 PPC_AMP_IN
0.7VDC MMBR941
1 1 3
C57 L54 0 C58 .1uf 1.5VDC 5
L55
15pf NU NU .15uH NU DEMOD_OUT 31 2.0VDC
R53 2 PPC_AMP_OUT
12K 45.1MHZ
2 C60 .47uf
.1uf C62
8 IF_IN
3.0VDC AUDIO_IN 29 2.4VDC
1
GND
13 28 2.5VDC
A+_B+ DETAUDIO
14 AUDIO_OUT
SWB+ DRIVE
C75
U51 2.4VDC
4.4VDC 7 LO_IN 23 C80
3.9pf SQ_LIM_OUT
IFIC NU
C73
2.6VDC 10 C63
OSC_OUT
20 2.4VDC
2 13pf SQ_ATTEN_IN
R66 Y53 C74 R64 3.4VDC 9
OSC_FB
820 45MHz 36pf 5600 51pf
1 27 22
44.645 5R T_R ADAPT ADAPT
2 5.0VDC(UNSQ)
VCC1 0VDC(SQ)
C79 15 C87
SQ_OUT 5.0VDC(UNSQ)
16pf 12 1000pf
VCC2 0VDC(SQ)
2.4VDC
17 18
5V VCC3 FAST_SQ
C69 L58
3.3uf 3-5VDC 1.2uH C71 C70 34

PCC_2_SU
VCC4 R68

RSSI_OUT
SQ_TAIL
10uf .1uf 30
SQ_NOISE SQATTNIN

FILTER
3.7VDC

SQ_IN
C68 R57 C81
.039uf 130K 25 0

ICO
RSSI_OUT_2
R60
.1uf 16 19 11 26 24 10K
C87 C85 C86
3-5VDC 1000pf 1000pf 1000pf

C67 C66 R58 RSSI

C64
4.7uf .1uf 13K 1000pf

0.5-3.0VDC 0.65VDC
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF RECEIVER MODULE
VHF (146-174MHz)
GEPD5563

RF (Receiver Module) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-11

 RF Schematic Diagram

RX_INJ

C260
8.2pf
C280
C272 R257 1000pf C231
3.6pf C261 C263
16pf 1.0pf C238 C237
82K CR253 .01uf 100pf 100pf C202
R258
R260 L256 C262 C264
100 C204 5.0VDC (LOCKED)
C266 FILT5V L257 .01uf 0VDC (UNLOCKED)
L259 1.2uH 220 1.2uH 9.1pf 13pf 5V
C268 1000pf
1.2uH C278 L267 4.7uf CR202 CR201
.22uf L258 C203
1000pf .18uH C222 .01uf LOCKDET
NC1 6

VCC 3

LA1 7

NC2 8

E1B 9
L262 L255 66.8nH C228 C219
L260 FILT5V 150pf 150pf

E1A
R264 12.6VDC
.12uH 2 RX 27nH 1.2uH R205 1000pf SYNLE
B1 11 C256 10 L201 2200 3-10VDC
C269 L261 C259 1.2uH

VCP 32

10
4 TX R202
BI1 12 1000pf C215 C216

7
TX_INJ C265 1000pf R265
.15uH 5600pf .1uf 2200

V_MULT_1

V_MULT_2
U251 .1uf

CEX
C270

LOCK
1000pf C271 L254 3-10VDC 29 I_OUT
3.9pf 22 NC4 4.7
4.7pf VCOBIC VC 13 C255 C201 SL 31 I_ADAPT 8 2.5VDC C218 MODIN
C253 R201 T1 MOD_IN
R261 .15uH 51 NU R206 R215
24 NC5 2.5VDC
BI2 14 6.8pf C284 22pf
1 4 GND FREQ_OUT
11 1000pf
2.1MHZ
220 3-10VDC 13 GND 12 2200 1000
L251 C254 1.5pf L253 CR252 C214 DC_5V_REF_OSC 5V R216
1 GND2 B2 15 C279 1.2uH 1.0pf 1uf U201 R286 R267 2.0VDC 24K C290
20 GND1

79.4nH 30 GND 14 C223

.22uf
21 RBY

5 TRB

18 NC3

XTAL_1
17 E2B

16 E2A
1000pf
19 LA2

FRACTN-32 33pf
23 PS

C217 28 MOD_OUT 15 0 0 C230

R254 XTAL_2 C205
10K 4.7uf 1.2VDC 220pf .1uf
C275 L268 2.5VDC 1 AUX_3 16

23 DC_5V_REF_DIV
WARP

22 DC_5V_PRESC
1000pf C252 1.2uH 2
20 PRE_IN 17 4.65VDC C206 R207 Y201T

18 SUP_F_OUT
L252 11pf C257 R253 C258

3 DC_5V_SRL
C235 SUP_CAP

SRL_CLK
5 SRL_DATA
1.2uH CR255 47pf 2400 16.8MHz

27 CP_BIAS1
26 CP_BIAS2

19 SUP_F_IN
1000pf 3000 NU .018uf C232 1

24 TEST_1
25 TEST_2
C207 NU
R251 R263 C281 0.7VDC(R) 4.7uf

21 GND
C251 C233

1.5VDC
82K 7500 NU 15pf 4.2VDC(T)
FILT5V
FILT5V R211

6
C209 CR203 2.7pf
C276 NC NC 47K
C273 NU
1000pf C224
.220uf
L204 1000pf
C211 C229
.1uH 4.7uf .22uf
C227 C226 R212
7.5pf R203 R204
13pf L203 NU 47K 33K
1.2uH
4.65VDC
FILT5V
(SOURCE) C210 C212 C236
4.7uf 1000pf 470pf

C208 C291
.1uf C220
4.7uf 150pf C221 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF SYNTHESIZER
150pf
VHF (146-174MHz)
5V CLK DATA GEPD5560

RF (Synthesiser) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-13

 RF Schematic Diagram

C120 CR102
RX_IN
470pf C119 C118 R102 TXB+
20pf 470pf 150

C104 L103 L101 C102

R103 R108 220pf .68uH .68uH 1uf

75 75

HARMONIC FILTER L112 L106

J2 7T .68uH 2 4
RF_JACK INSTPAR VS1 VS2
4PIN C121 L109 L108 L107 C103 3 C116
7T 7T 7T CR101 VCONT R105
S1 6 1
RF_OUT RF_IN TX_INJ
1 C122 INSTPAR INSTPAR INSTPAR 5
VS3 18
S2 470pf 82pf 1000pf R104
U709 VS4 R106
2 C115 C114 C113 C112 300 300
S3 18pf L111 27.0pf 51pf 36pf 22pf SHW5066
J1 3 INSTPAR TXB+
ANTENNAE
C106
C111 L102
(SOURCE)
C117 470pf L104 R107 .68uH
8.2pf BEAD 47 220pf
1/8W
5V C167
C105 .039uf C164
R101
470pf 3
SWB+ 10uf C168
Q154 C158
C101
0.1
C107
R174
.039uf
TO U51-PIN 13,14 M41L03 .01uf R153 1W Q155
1uf 22 .039uf R151 1
2 3 56.2K 100K
SWB+ Q405 1% NPN
2 R175 MMBT3904
SENSE HI 6200
R161 R438 2
680
1 1
3300 R155 SENSE LO
MMBT3906
3 1
5R
3 56.2K
VDD
1%
Q153 SOURCE
U152 R154 R152
SWB+ MMBT3904 1 22 100K 100K
CLK DAC DAC2 4.52VDC(HI)
NPN 24 9 1% 1%
RESET DAC1 2.00VDC(LO)
C199 21 3
C156 EN BIAS_EN
2 150pf 16 2
470pf TEMP ANT_SEL R171
14 8 51K
U410 15
BATT 2_POLE_V
12 C152 C153
AUX FREQ_SW_DA
C163 C151 R166
NPN_DUAL 1 4 10 .1uf
R162 180
R_T
120 23 17
5 2 4
DATA_IN SCB1
18 470pf 470pf 470pf Q152
FREQ_SW0 SCB2 MJD2955
5 19 R157
FREQ_SW1 SCB3 R167 1800
6 20 N3 N2 3 2
FREQ_SW2 SCB4 R172 16K SWB+
6 3 7 22K 3 2

4
FREQ_SW3
N4 R160 TO U51-PIN 13,14
VSS
Q156 U151A-1 C193 680
13 MMBT3904 3 OPAMP_4PIN
R412 1
R413 NPN 1.65VDC(HI)
180 1 C165
680 N1 .1uf U151A-2 0.75VDC(LO)
.01uf 3
1 N2 OPAMP_4PIN
R193
DATA 6 Q151
3
DS401 1 7
N1
1
20K N3 NPN R158
R179 2 R156 R173 R170 2.31VDC(HI) MMBT3904
5
C800 8 N4 180
R168 1.40VDC(LO)
360 3900 NU NU .1uf 2
C159 100K C154
470pf R159
4 2 C166
CLK RESET DACLE R169
LED_DUAL 2.91VDC(HI) .47uf
180
1.11VDC(LO) C157 470pf
10K

5V .01uf

EN_BIAS

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF TRANSMITTER MODULE

VHF (146-174MHz)
GEPD5562

RF (Transmitter Module) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-15

 RF Board 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404880J01

RF Board 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing-

8404880J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

capacitor, fixed: pF+/-5%; 50V C077 2113740A14 3.0

(unless otherwise stated)
C079 2113740A34 16
C028 2113740A48 51
C081 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20%
C029 2113740A48 51
C082 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20%
C030 2113740A79 1000
C083 2113741A21 1000
C031 2113740A79 1000
C085- 2113741A21 1000
C033 2113740A24 6.8 C087

C034 2113741A45 10000 C101 2311049A07 1.0uF, 10%

C035 2113740A53 82 C102 2311049A07 1.0uF, 10%

C051 2113740A53 82 C103 2113740A53 82

C053 2113740A37 22 C104 2113740A63 220

C054 2113740A33 15 C105 2311049J25 1.0uF, 10%

C055 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% C106 2113740A63 220

C056 2113740A36 20 C107 2113741A59 39000

C059 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% C111 2113740A71 470

C060 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% C112 2113740A37 22

C061 2113741A25 1500 C113 2113740A42 36

C062 2311049A05 0.47uF, 10% C114 2113740A48 51

C063 2113740A48 51 C115 2113740A39 27

C064 2113741A21 1000 C116 2113740A79 1000

C066 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% C117 2113740A27 8.2

C067 2311049J11 4.7uF, 10% C118 2113740A71 470

C068 2113741A59 39000 C119 2113740A36 20

C069 2311049J07 3.3uF, 10% C120 2113740A71 470

C070 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% C121 2113740A71 470

C071 2311049J25 10uF, 10% C122 2113740A35 18

C073 2113740A32 13 C151 2113740A71 470

C074 2113740A42 36 C152 2113740A71 470

C075 2113740A17 3.9 C153 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20%

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-17

RF Board 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404880J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

C154 2113740A71 470 C224 2113740A79 1000

C156 2113740A71 470 C226 2113740A14 3.O

C157 2113741A45 10000 C227 2113740A03 1.O

C158 2113741A45 10000 C228 2113740A59 150, +-30%

C159 2113740A71 470 C229 2113743A23 220nF

C163 2113740A71 470 C230 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20%

C164 2113740A71 470 C231 2113741A45 10000

C165 2113741A45 10000 C233 2113740G13 2.7

C166 2311049A05 0.47uF, 10% C235 2113741A51 18000

C167 2113741A59 39000 C236 2113740A71 470

C168 2113741A59 39000 C237 2113740A55 100

C193 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% C238 2113740A55 100

C199 2113740A59 150, +-30% C251 2113740A33 15

C202 2113741A45 10000 C252 2113740A30 11

C203 2113741A45 10000 C253 2113740A34 16

C204 2311049J11 4.7uF, 10% C254 2113740A03 1.O

C205 2113740A63 220 C255 2113740A37 22

C206 2113740G46 47, +-2% C256 2113740A79 1000

C207 2311049J11 4.7uF, 10% C257 2113740A79 1000

C208 2311049J11 4.7uF, 10% C259 2113740A79 1000

C210 2311049J11 4.7uF, 10% C260 2113740A27 8.2

C211 2311049J11 4.7uF, 10% C261 2113740A34 16

C212 2113741A21 1000 C262 2113740A28 9.1

C214 2311049A07 1.0uF, 10% C263 2113740A03 1.O,

C215 2113741A39 5600 C264 2113740A32 13

C216 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% C265 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20%

C217 2311049J11 4.7uF,10% C266 2113740A79 1000

C218 2113741A21 1000 C268 2113741A21 1000

C219 2113740A59 150, +-30% C269 2113740A79 1000

C220 2113740A59 150, +-30% C270 2113740A17 3.9

C221 2113740A59 150, +-30% C271 2113740A19 4.7

C222 2113741A21 1000 C272 2113740A16 3.6

C223 2113740A41 33 C273 2113740A79 1000

6B.4-18 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404880J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

C275 2113740A79 1000 C466- 2113741A21 1000

C468
C276 2113743A23 220nF
C469 2113740A46 47
C278 2311049A03 0.33uF, 10%
C472- 2113741A21 1000
C279 2311049A03 0.33uF, 10% C476
C280 2113740A79 1000 C479 2113740A71 470
C284 2113740A07 1.5 C481 2113740A59 150, +-30%
C287 2113740A79 1000 C485 2113740A79 1000
C290 2113740A79 1000 C486 2113740A79 1000
C291 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% C498 2113741A21 1000
C409 2113740A59 150, +-30% C499 2113741A21 1000
C410 2113740A59 150, +-30% C789 2113740A55 100
C418 2311049J25 1.0uF, 10% C790 2113740A79 1000
C419 2113741A51 18000 Filter:
C421 2311049A05 0.47uF, 10% CF51 9180098D04 Ceramic filter
C426 2113743A23 220nF CF52 9180098D03 Ceramic filter
C427 2113743A23 220nF Clip:
C428 2113740A71 470 CL02- 4280138R01 Butterfly
CL09
C429 2113741A37 4700
CL11 4280138R01 Butterfly
C430 2113740A71 470
Diode:
C436 2113740A71 470
CR002 4880174R01 Diode quad soic 8 pin
C437 2311049A05 0.47uF, 10%
CR051 4880154K03 Dual Schottky diode
C438 2311049J11 0.47uF, 10%
CR101 4880973Z02 PIN diode
C441 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20%
CR102 4880973Z02 PIN diode
C442 2113740A79 1000
CR201 4813833C07 Dual 100W
C443 2113740A79 1000
CR202 4813833C07 Dual 100W
C452 2311049J11 0.47uF, 10%
CR203 4802245J22 Varactor
C454- 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20%
C457 CR252 4862824C03 Varactor
C459 2113741A21 1000 CR253 4862824C03 Varactor
C460 2113741A21 1000 CR255 4862824C03 Varactor
C461 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% CR405 4880107R01 Rectifier
C464 2160521G37 100nF, +80%/-20% Light Emitting Diode:

DS401 4805729G49 DIode Red/Yellow

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-19

RF Board 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404880J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

Mechanical: L251 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5%

H101 300136783 Screw 2-56X5/16; 2used L252 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5%

H102 1405160A02 Insulator, crystal L253 2480145S05 Coil 51/2turn Ferrite core

H103 0780511B01 Bracket, freqswitch, plated L254 2462587N55 Chip 150nH, 5%

Connector, Receptacle: L255 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5%

J1 3980515C02 Antenna Contact L256 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5%

J2 0180117S05 RF Jack assembly L257 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5%

J3 0180417C01 Assembly Option Jack L258 2480145S04 Coil, 4.5 turns, Ferrite
core
J5 0180195R03 Speaker Microphone
Header L259 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5%

J6 0180965Z01 Connector B+ L260 2483411T62 Chip shielded

J200 0904358J02 28-Pin Interface conn. L261 2462587N55 Chip 150nH, 5%

Coil, Inductor: L262 2462587N46 Chip 27nH, 5%

L009 2462587N45 Chip 22nH, 5% L267 2462587N56 Chip 180nH, 5%

L011 2462587N51 Chip 68nH, 5% L268 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5%

L051 2483411T63 Chip shielded L403 2462587N22 Chip 390nH, 10%

L052 2462587N61 Chip 470nH, 5% L404 2462587N22 Chip 390nH, 10%

L053 2462587N69 Chip1200nH, 5% L405 2462587N22 Chip 390nH, 10%

L055 2483411T75 Chip shielded L406 2462587N22 Chip 390nH, 10%

L058 2483411T74 Chip shielded L407 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5%

L101 2411087B24 TDK molded coil 68nH, L710 2462587N60 Chip 390nH, 5%

L102 2411087B24 TDK molded coil 68nH, L717 2462587N60 Chip 390nH, 5%

L103 2411087B24 TDK molded coil 68nH, T1 2580163M03 XFMR Coil

L104 2484657R01 Ferrite bead T2 2580163M03 XFMR Coil

L106 2411087B24 TDK molded coil 68nH, Meter:

L107 2405486C76 Airwound coil 7T 0705196A11 SUPR XTAL mounting

L108 2405318D12 Airwound coil 7T M700 0780165R02 Crystal boot

L109 2405486C76 Airwound coil 7T 4080485C03 switcht actile

L111 2405835C03 Airwound coil Transistor:

L112 2405486C77 Airwound coil 7T Q051 4813827A07 NPN SML SIG

L201 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5% Q151 4880214G02 NPN

L203 2462587N69 Chip 1200nH, 5% Q152 4813822A10 PNP 60V 10A

L204 2462587N56 Chip 180nH, 5% Q153 4880214G02 NPN

6B.4-20 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404880J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

Q154 4880141L03 PNP R153 0662057C35 22

Q155 4880214G02 NPN R154 0660076F01 100K 1%

Q156 4880214G02 NPN R155 0660076F29 56.2K 1%

Q405 4805128M67 NPN R156 0662057C89 3900

Q408 4805128M67 NPN R157 0662057C81 1800

Q410 4880141L03 PNP R158 0662057C57 180

Q411 4805128M19 SOT-23 R159 0662057C57 180

Q412 4805128M67 NPN R160 0662057C71 680

Resistor, Fixed: Ohm+/-5%; 1/8w R161 0662057C71 680

C078 0662057C01 0 R162 0662057C53 120

C286 0662057C01 0 R166 0662057C57 180

R051 0662057C44 51 R167 0662057D05 16K

R052 0662057D12 33K R168 0662057D24 100K

R053 0662057D02 12K R169 0662057C99 10K

R054 0662057C82 2000 R171 0662057D17 51K

R055 0662057C51 100 R172 0662057D08 22K

R057 0662057D27 130K R174 0662057D24 100K

R058 0662057D03 13K R175 0662057C94 6200

R060 0662057D27 130K R179 0662057C64 360

R064 0662057C93 5600 R193 0662057D07 20K

R066 0662057C73 820 R201 0662057C44 51

R067 0662057C95 6800 R202 0662057C83 2200

R068 0662057C75 1000 R203 0662057D16 47K

R101 0680106R01 0.1, +/-1% R204 0662057D12 33K

R102 0662057C55 150 1/10W R205 0662057C83 2200

R103 0662057C48 75 R206 0662057C83 2200

R104 0662057C62 300 R207 0662057C83 2200

R105 0662057C33 18 R211 0662057D16 47K

R106 0662057C62 300 R215 0662057C75 1000

R107 0611077A18 4.7 R216 0662057D09 24K

R108 0662057C48 75 R251 0662057D22 82K 1/10W

R151 0660076F29 56.2K 1% R253 0662057C86 3000 1/10W

R152 0660076F01 100K 1% R254 0662057C99 10K

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-21

RF Board 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404880J01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

R257 0662057D22 82K 1/10W R496 0662057C63 330

R258 0662057C51 100 R497 0662057C67 470

R260 0662057C59 220 R503 0662057C63 330

R261 0662057C59 220 R507 0662057C75 1000

R263 0662057C96 7500 R702 0662057C82 2000

R264 0662057C27 10 R801- 0662057C99 10K

R804
R265 0662057C19 4.7
Shield:
R267 0662057C01 0
SH100 2680966Y04 Synthesizer, Front
R408 0662057D07 20K
SH101 2680970Y04 VCO, Front
R409 0662057D15 43K
SH103 2680970Z04 Synthesizer, Back
R410 0662057D07 20K
SH104 2680958Z04 Mixer, Back
R411 0662057D15 43K
SH105 2680968Z04 VCO, Back
R412 0662057C57 180
Switch:
R413 0662057C71 680
SW401 4080502B01 Frequency switch
R414 0662057D41 510K
PB401 4080485C08 Monitor switch
R415 0662057D41 510K
PB402 4080485C08 Option switch
R416 0662057C51 100
PB403 4080485C08 PTT switch
R417 0662057C51 100
Integrated Circuit:
R424 0662057C51 100
U051 5180207R01 I F IC
R438 0662057C87 3300
U151A 5180932W01 Linear Op-Amp
R447 0662057C93 5600
U152 5105226P38 DAC
R448 0662057C01 0
U201 5105457W61 Synthesizer, QFP
R449 0662057D24 100K
U251 5105414S84 VCO
R451 0662057C83 2200
U252 0180706Y82 Receiver board
R452 0662057D30 180K
U405 5180932W01 Linear Op-Amp
R460 1880143S03 Volume potentiometer
U409 5180175R01 Audio amplifier
R466 0662057C91 4700
U410 5180159R01 Dual trans NPNS
R467 0662057C27 10
U708 5105469E65 Voltage Regulator
R469 0662057C81 1800
U709 4280126S01 PA heatsink
R488 0662057D32 220K
U709 5180111R02 VHF Bipolar RF Power
R489 0611077A12 2.7 module
R490 0611077A12 2.7 Zener Diode:
R494 0662057D24 100K VR401 4880140L15 10V ZENER

6B.4-22 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8404880J01

Circuit Motorola
Description
Ref Part no.

VR704 4813830A18 SOT

Crystal:

Y051A 9180112R06 45.1 MHz Crystal Filter

Y051B 9180112R06 45.1 MHz Crystal Filter

Y053 4880606B02 Crystal

Y201 4880114R02 Crystal 16.8 MHz

Non-referenced Items

8404880J01 PCB, 12.5kHz VHF QFP

version

8404627J01 m/board to controller flex

8404628J01 Heatseal flex

2604619J01 Controller shield

1504618J01 Housing (Display)

1504618J02 Housing (Non-display)

7504620J01 Keypad

6104617J01 Lightpipe

6104622J01 Display lens

6104622J02 Non-display lens

3304623J01 Nameplate

3604642J02 Freq. knob

3604641J01 Volume knob

7504805J02 PTT Keypad

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-23

6B.4-24 Diagrams and Parts Lists
 RF Schematic Diagram

RX FE Module Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-25

 RX Module 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing - 8480672C01

RX Module 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing -

8480672C01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

Capacitor, fixed: pF +/-0.1pF Coil, Inductor:

(unless otherwise stated)
L1 - L7 2480140E04 chip, 65NH
C1 2113740A35 18
Non-Referenced Items:
C2 2113740A46 47
8480672C01 PCB
C3 2113740A48 51
0780102S01 leadframe; 3 used
C4 2113740A35 18
2680625B02 Shield, Receiver
C6 2113740G27 8.2

C7 2113740G31 12

C8 2113740G16 3.6

C9 2113740G27 8.2

C10 2113740A37 22

C11 2113740A42 36

C12 2113740A71 470

C13 2113740A33 15

C15 2113740A51 68

C16 2113740A37 22

C17 2113740A52 75

C18 2113740A39 27

C19 2113740A41 33

Diode:

CR1 4880154K03 dual Schottky mixer

Transistor:

Q1 4880173R01 RF, transistor

Resistor, fixed: ohm +/-5%; 1/8W

(unless otherwise stated)

R1 0660076A61 3300

R2 0660076A47 820

R3 0660076A69 6800

R4 0611077A18 4700

R5 0660076A43 560

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6B.4-27

RX Module 146-174MHz 5W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing - 8480672C01

6B.4-28 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6C
438-470MHz Specific Information
Table of Contents

Chapter
6C.1 Model Chart and Test Specifications

6C.2 Radio Tuning Procedure

6C.3 Theory of Operation

6C.4 PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists

438-470MHz Specific Information 6C-i

Table of Contents

6C-ii 438-470MHz Specific Information

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6C.1
Model Chart and Test Specifications
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview......................................................................................................1

2.0 Model Chart .................................................................................................1

3.0 Technical Specification ............................................................................. 2

3.1 General ........................................................................................................ 2
3.2 Receiver....................................................................................................... 2
3.3 Transmitter................................................................................................... 2
3.4 Battery Life....................................................................................................2

Model Chart and Test Specifications 6C.1-i

Table of Contents

6C.1-ii Model Chart and Test Specifications

 Overview

1.0 Overview
6C.1

This chapter lists the UHF 438-470MHz models and technical specifications for the GP600 portable
radio.

2.0 Model Chart GP600 438-470 MHz 12.5 kHz 4W MPT D

GP600 438-470 MHz 12.5 kHz 4W MPT

GP600
Description

UHF
438 - 470 MHz
X = Indicates one of each required
AZP94VJB05N2_E
AZP94VJA05N2_E
Model

Item Description
X X PMLE4073_ RF Board, 12.5 kHz, (438-470 MHz)
X PMLN4086_ GP600 Front Cover Display Kit
X PMLN4087_ GP600 Front Cover Non-Display Kit
X X HLN9667_ Chassis Hardware Assembly
X X NAE6483_ Whip Antenna (438-470 MHz)
X X HNN9628_ Battery
X X 6802908X01_ GP600 User Guide

Model Chart and Technical Specifications 6C.1-1

3.0 Technical Specification

3.1 General 3.3 Transmitter

Frequency Range UHF: 438-470 MHz Power Output 1-4W

(no degradation) ........... ...
Channel Spacing 12.5/20/25 kHz
Maximum Deviation
Modulation FM, 12.5kHz ± 2.5
Type 8K5G3, 25kHz ±5
14G3,16G3
Audio Distortion <3 %
Antenna Impedance 50 ohms (@1kHz, 60% deviation)

Mode of Operation Trunked/Conventional Spurious and Harmonics -36 dBm

Power Supply 1200 mAH Battery Switching Bandwidth 32 MHz

No degradation .......... ...
Operating Temperature -25 to +55°C

Storage Temperature -40 to +85°C

3.4 Battery Life
Environmental MIL-STD 810C/D/E

Frequency Stability 1200mAh Battery Capacity

12.5 kHz ppm ±1.00
25 kHz ppm ±1.35 Medium Ultra-High

UHF (5-5-90) 4 Watt* 8 hrs 8 hrs

3.2 Receiver *Typical Values

12.5kHz 20/25kHz

Sensitivity*
12dB SINAD (emf) µV 0.35µV 0.35µV
20dB SINAD (emf) µV 0.5µV 0.5µV Note: Self Quieting Frequencies
Audio Output Power
Self-quieting frequencies are frequencies
<5% distortion @1kHz 500 mW 500 mW
that are also generated by the radio and
with rated audio output
cause internal interference. On these
Spurious / Image 70 dB 70 dB frequencies the interference caused by the
Rejection self-quieter spur is great enough that a
radio will not meet its receiver sensitivity
Selectivity 60 dB 60 dB
specification.
Intermodulation 65 dB 65 dB
The frequency is: 453.6MHz
Switching Bandwidth 32 MHz
No degradation ....... ..... .

6C.1-2 Model Chart and Technical Specifications

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6C.2
Radio Tuning Procedure
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 GP600 Radio Tuning .................................................................................. 1
1.1 General ........................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Transmitter Power ....................................................................................... 2
1.3 Reference Oscillator .................................................................................... 3
1.4 Rated Volume .............................................................................................. 3
1.5 Squelch Attenuation..................................................................................... 4
1.6 Transmit Deviation Balance (Compensation) .............................................. 4
1.7 Transmit Deviation Limit .............................................................................. 5
1.8 RSSI ............................................................................................................ 5
1.9 MPT1327 Transmit Deviation / DTMF Transmit Deviation .......................... 6

Radio Tuning Procedure 6C.2-i

Table of Contents

6C.2-ii Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.0 GP600 Radio Tuning

6C.2

1.1 General

The recommended hardware platform is a 386 or 486 DX 33 PC (personal computer) with 8 Mbytes
RAM, MsDOS 3.3, Windows 3.1 or later, and DPS (Dealer Programming Software). These are
required to align the radio. Refer to the DPS Installation Manual (section 2 of the Product Manual) for
installation and setup procedures for the required software; the user manual is accessed (and can
be printed if required) via the DPS.

To perform the alignment procedures, the radio must be connected to the PC, RIB (Radio Interface
Box), and Universal Test Set as shown in figure 2-1.
SERVICE MONITOR
30 dB PAD OR COUNTER
TRANSMIT

30 dB PAD WATTMETER

BNC
RF GENERATOR
SMA-BNC RECEIVE
58-80348B33

SET TO APPROX. 450mV FOR TX

AUDIO IN TX
BATTERY TEST SET AUDIO GENERATOR
ELIMINATOR RTX-4005B
RLN-1014A RX
SINAD METER
RADIO TEST CABLE
RKN4034
AC VOLTMETER

MEASURE 80mV FOR TX

PROGRAM/TEST CABLE
HKN9857

COMPUTER

RIB DATA
HLN9214 BUSY
GND

COMPUTER INTERFACE CABLE

HKN9216

RIB POWER SUPPLY

HSN9412 (110 VAC.)/
0180358A56 (220 VAC.)

Figure 2-1 Radio Alignment Test Setup.

All tuning procedures are performed from the Service menu.

Before going into the Service menu, the radio must first be read using the File / Read Radio menu (if
the radio has just been programmed with data loaded from disk or from a newly created codeplug,
then it must still be read so that the DPS will have the radio’s actual tuning values).

All Service windows read and program the radio codeplug directly; you do NOT have to use the DPS
Read Radio / Write Radio functions to program new tuning values.

CAUTION: DO NOT switch radios in the middle of any Service procedure. Always use
the Program or Cancel key to close the tuning window before disconnect-
ing the radio. Improper exits from the Service window may leave the radio
in an improperly configured state and result in seriously degraded radio or
system performance.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6C.2-1

GP600 Radio Tuning

The Service windows introduce the concept of the “Softpot”, an analog SOFTware controlled
POTentiometer used for adjusting all transceiver alignment controls. A softpot can be selected by
clicking with the mouse at the value or the slider or by hitting the TAB key until the value or the slider
is highlighted.

Each Service window provides the capability to increase or decrease the ‘softpot’ value with the
mouse, the arrow keys or by entering a value with the keyboard. The window displays the minimum,
maximum, and step value of the softpot. In addition transmitter tuning windows indicate the
transmitter frequency and whether the radio is keyed.

Adjusting the softpot value sends information to the radio to increase (or decrease) a DC voltage in
the corresponding circuit. For example, increasing the value in the Reference Oscillator tune window
instructs the radio microprocessor to increases the voltage across a varactor in the reference
oscillator to increase the frequency. Pressing the Program button stores all the softpot values of the
current window permanently in the radio.

In ALL cases, the softpot value is just a relative number corresponding to a D/A (Digital-to-Analog)
generated voltage in the radio. All standard measurement procedures and test equipment are
similar to previous radios.

Refer to the DPS on-line help for information on the tuning software. Perform the following
procedures in the sequence indicated.

Note: All tuning procedures must be performed at a supply voltage of 7.5V unless
otherwise stated.

1.2 Transmitter Power

The radio requires two power level settings, a high power level setting, and a low power level setting.
To set the transmitter power, either to high or low setting, follow the procedures below:

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Transmit Low Power for low power tuning and select Transmit High Power for high power
tuning. In each case, the window will indicate 7 transmitter test frequencies for fine tune and
one for coarse tune.
3. Select the first test frequency of fine tune.
4. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
5. Measure the transmitter power on your power meter.
6. Vary the value of the selected slider (or by entering value in the box) until you get the desired
power.
7. Once you get the desired power, press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
8. Repeat steps 4-7 for all test frequencies shown in the window.
9. Press Program to store the softport values.

6C.2-2 Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.3 Reference Oscillator

Adjustment of the reference oscillator is critical for proper radio operation. Improper adjustment will
not only result in poor operation, but also a misaligned radio that will interfere with other users
operating on the adjacent channels. For this reason, the reference oscillator should be checked
every time the radio is serviced. The frequency counter used for this procedure must have a stability
of 0.1 ppm (or better).

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Reference Oscillator to open the reference oscillator tuning window.
3. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
4. Measure the transmit frequency on your frequency counter.
5. Adjust the reference oscillator per the targets shown in table 2-1.
6. Press Toggle PTT again to dekey the radio and then press Program to store the softpot value..

Table 2-1 Reference Oscillator Alignment

RF-Band Target

UHF 438-470MHz ±150 Hz

1.4 Rated Volume

The rated volume softpot sets the volume at normal test modulation.

1. Use test box (RTX4005) and set SW1 switch to speaker. Connect an AC voltmeter to the test
box meter port.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select Rated Volume to open the rated volume tuning window. The screen will indicate the
receive test frequency to be used.
4. Set the RF test generator to the receive test frequency and apply -47 dBm RF carrier frequency
with a 1 kHz tone at 60 % rated deviation. The 1 kHz tone must be audible to make sure the
radio is receiving.
5. Adjust the value of the obtained rated audio volume ( as close as 2.7 Vrms)
6. Press Program to store the softpot value.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6C.2-3

GP600 Radio Tuning

1.5 Squelch Attenuation

The squelch softpots set the signal to noise ratio at which the squelch opens. The squelch value
needs to be set at 7 frequencies across the frequency range.

1. Use test box (RTX4005), connect a SINAD meter to the “METER” port.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select Squelch Attenuation to open the squelch attenuation tuning window. The window will
indicate the receive test frequencies to be used.
4. Select the first test frequency shown, and set the corresponding value to 0.
5. Set the RF test generator to the test frequency, offset it with +500 Hz, and modulate it at 60 %
deviation with 1 kHz tone. Adjust the generator for a 18 dB SINAD level (weighted with
psophometric filter).
6. Adjust the softpot value until the squelch just closes.
7. Monitor for squelch chatter; if chatter is present, repeat step 6.
8. When no chatter is detected, select the next softpot and repeat steps 5 -7 for all test
frequencies shown in the window.
9. Press Program to store the softpot values.

1.6 Transmit Deviation Balance (Compensation)

Compensation alignment balances the modulation sensitivity of the VCO and reference modulation
(synthesizer low frequency port) lines. Compensation algorithm is critical to the operation of
signalling schemes that have very low frequency components (e.g. DPL) and could result in
distorted waveforms if improperly adjusted. The compensation value needs to be set at 7
frequencies across the frequency range.

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Modulation Attenuation to open the deviation balance tuning window. The window will
indicate the transmit test frequencies to be used.
3. Use the Test Box (RTX4005) and inject a 80 Hz tone at 100 mVrms into the “Audio In” port.
Connect an AC meter to the meter port to insure the proper input signal level.
4. Select the first test frequency shown in the window.
5. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
6. Measure the transmitter deviation.
7. Change the input tone to 3 kHz, 100 mVrms.
8. Measure again the transmitter deviation.
9. Adjust this deviation to within +/- 2 % of the value recorded earlier in step 6.
10. Check the deviation at 80 Hz again and repeat step 7, if it has changed since step 6.
11. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
12. Repeat steps 3-10 for the remaining test frequencies.
13. Press Program to store the softpot values.

Note: The step size change for step 8 is approximately 2.5% softpot value.

6C.2-4 Radio Tuning Procedure

 GP600 Radio Tuning

1.7 Transmit Deviation Limit

The transmit deviation limit softpot sets the maximum deviation of the carrier. The deviation value
needs to be set at 7 frequencies across the frequency range.

1. From the Service menu, Select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Reference Attenuation to open the reference attenuation tuning window.
3. Set the maximum value and press Program to store the softpot value.
4. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.
5. Select VCO Attenuation to open the deviation limit tuning window. The window will indicate the
transmit test frequencies to be used.
6. Use Test Box (RTX4005) and inject a 1 kHz tone at 80 mVrms into the “Audio In” port. Connect
an AC meter to the meter port to insure the proper input signal level.
7. Select the first test frequency shown in the window.
8. Press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that the radio is transmitting.
9. Adjust the transmitter deviation to the value shown in table 2-2.
10. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
11. Repeat steps 8 - 10 for the remaining test frequencies.
12. Press Program to store the softpot values.

Table 2-2 Transmitter Deviation

Channel Spacing Deviation

12.5 kHz 2.2-2.3 kHz

25 kHz 4.3-4.6 kHz

1.8 RSSI
1. Use test box (RTX4005) and set the SW1 switch to SPEAKER.
2. From the Service menu, select Receiver Alignment.
3. Select RSSI to open the RSSI tuning window. The screen will indicate the receive test
frequency to be used.
4. Set the RF test generator to the receive test frequency, and set the RF level to the value
indicated for RSSI Level 0, modulated with 1 kHz tone at 60 % deviation. The 1 kHz tone must
be audible to make sure the radio is receiving.
5. Press Program to store the softpot value for RSSI Level 0.
6. Repeat steps 4 - 5 for the remaining RSSI levels.
7. Press Cancel to close the window.

Radio Tuning Procedure 6C.2-5

GP600 Radio Tuning

1.9 MPT1327 Transmit Deviation / DTMF Transmit Deviation

The MPT1327 Deviation Softpot is used to tune the FFSK signalling deviation. Tuning is performed
at one frequency. The radio generates an alternating bit pattern for tuning. Values for others
frequencies are calculated by the radio software.

The DTMF Deviation Softpot is used to tune the DTMF signalling deviation. Tuning is performed at
one frequency. The radio generates a DTMF signal for tuning. Values for other frequencies are
calculated by the radio software.

1. From the Service menu, select Transmitter Alignment.

2. Select Signalling Deviation to open the signalling deviation tuning window.
3. Select the MPT value and press Toggle PTT to key the radio. The status bar will indicate that
the radio is transmitting.
4. Adjust the transmitter deviation to the value shown in table 2-3.
5. Press Toggle PTT to dekey the radio.
6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 for DTMF deviation.
7. Press Program to store the softpot value.

Table 2-3 Signalling Deviation

Channel Spacing MPT 1327 Deviation

12.5 kHz 1.4-1.6 kHz 1.5-1.8 kHz

25 kHz 2.8-3.2 kHz 3.0-3.4 kHz

6C.2-6 Radio Tuning Procedure

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6C.3
Theory of Operation
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Overview..................................................................................................... 1

2.0 RF Section .................................................................................................. 1

2.1 Receiver....................................................................................................... 1
2.2 Transmitter................................................................................................... 3

3.0 Frequency Generation Circuitry ............................................................... 5

3.1 Synthesizer .................................................................................................. 5
3.2 VCO ............................................................................................................. 6

4.0 Controller.................................................................................................... 8
4.1 Functions ..................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Normal Operation ........................................................................................ 9
4.3 Clock Synthesizer ........................................................................................ 9
4.4 Bus Operation.............................................................................................. 9
4.5 RAM............................................................................................................. 9
4.6 EEPROM ................................................................................................... 10
4.7 SPI Interface .............................................................................................. 10
4.8 LED Control ............................................................................................... 10
4.9 Audio & Data Circuitry ............................................................................... 10
4.10 External PTT Sense Circuits...................................................................... 11
4.11 MIC Amplifier ............................................................................................. 11
4.12 TX Data Circuits......................................................................................... 11
4.13 Sub-Audible Data (PL/DPL)....................................................................... 11
4.14 High-Speed Data ....................................................................................... 12
4.15 DTMF Data ................................................................................................ 12
4.16 MDC Data .................................................................................................. 12
4.17 RX Audio Processing and Digital Volume Control ..................................... 12

Theory of Operation 6C.3-i

Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
4.18 Audio Power Amplifier ............................................................................... 13
4.19 Audio PA Muting and Output Protection .................................................... 13
4.20 Receive Data Circuits ................................................................................ 13
4.21 Alert Tone Circuits ..................................................................................... 13

Figure
3.1 RF Block Diagram.................................................................................................................1
3.2 Receiver Block Diagram .......................................................................................................2
3.3 Transmitter Block Diagram ...................................................................................................4
3.4 Synthesizer Block Diagram...................................................................................................5
3.5 VCO Block Diagram..............................................................................................................6
3.6 Controller Block Diagram......................................................................................................8

6C.3-ii Theory of Operation

 Overview

1.0 Overview
6C.3

This section provides a detailed theory of operation for the GP600 and its components:the receiver,
the transmitter, the frequency generation circuitry, the controller and audio & data circuitry.

2.0 RF Section
A block diagram of the RF section is shown in figure 3-1. The RF section of the radio is divided into
Receiver and Transmitter functions.

Antenna Mixer Sq. Atten. Out

Switch Rx. Audio
Receiver
H.Filter Front End IF IFIC Carrier Det.
Module Adapt

Ref. Oscillator

Rx. Lo

Tx. Lo FRACT_N
VCO Mod. In
RF SYNTHESISER 28
PA Pin
Conn.
Mod.
ATTN Lock Det.

Current
Sense
Vctrl Prescalar
2.1MHz
Vref Reset Spi bus
Power
Control DAC
Circuit

Tx. MIC
Spi bus Audio Int./Ext
to AMP Mic
Rx./Tx, LED Rx. Audio
in from ASFIC
Int./Ext. Audio Pa ASFIC
Speaker

From
5V
REG. Reg. 5V
Batt.

PA Enable from
ASFIC

Figure 3-1 RF Block Diagram.

2.1 Receiver

The receiver of the GP600 radios consists of 4 major blocks each: the front-end module, the double
balanced mixer, the 45.1 MHz IF and the back-end IF IC.

The GP600 front-end modules consist of three blocks of circuitry each: a pre-selector, RF amplifier
and a post-selector filter. These three items are located on a receiver module PCB that stands
perpendicular to the main radio PCB.

Theory of Operation 6C.3-1

RF Section

This module is enclosed in a shield to prevent radiation into and out of the module. It also improved
the grounding of the module by soldering the module shield to the main RF Board. All filters on the
UHF modules are fixed tuned designs to eliminate the need for factory tuning and to provide wide-
band operation.

“5R” (5V)

1st RF 2nd
Bandpass Bandpass
Filter Amp Filter

Receiver Front-end Module Lo+6dBm

“5R” (5V)
Detected Audio

1st IF 2nd
Crystal Crystal IF IC
Filter Amp Filter

Figure 3-2 Receiver Block Diagram.

The shunt coupled resonator topology yields a more symmetrical frequency response to guard
against strong out of band signals that could produce IM products.

The pre-selector filter is a 4-pole, 0.01 dB Chebyshev bandpass design implemented in a shunt
coupled resonator topology. This topology maximizes the attenuation at the worst case image
frequency for UHF band which is 90.2 MHz below the filter passband. The 3 dB bandwidth is
approximately 52 MHz. The centre of the band insertion loss is approximately 3.5 dB. The 4-pole
filter is designed to operate with a 50 ohm input termination, while the output termination is the input
impedance of the RF amplifier that follows it.

The RF amplifier, Q1, is a Motorola MMBR941 NPN device biased in a common emitter
configuration. The amp is stabilized by the shunt feedback resistor R3, and has approximately 20 dB
of gain with a noise figure of about 2.5 dB. The amplifier draws 4.9 mA of current and is supplied by
the receiver 5 volt supply (indicated as “5R” on the schematics and block diagrams).

Terminating the RF amplifier is the post-selector filter. This filter is the same as the prefilter. The filter
is designed to be terminated with the amplifier output impedance on one side, and 50 ohm on the
other.

The net gain from the receiver module is about 12.5 dB in the centre of the band and about 11.5 dB
at the band edges. The net centre of the band noise figure is approximately 5.5 dB. This is sufficient
to achieve a typical centre of the band sensitivity of 12 dBs.

The double balanced mixer is composed of the two baluns, T1 and T2, and the ring diode IC, CR2.
The mixer operates with an LO level of +6 dBm and the conversion loss is approximately 7.5 dB. The
double balanced type mixer provides excellent isolation between any two ports. And since a dBm
can operate over a large bandwidth, the same mixer can be used for UHF radios. The dBm also
provides excellent protection against receiver spurs due to non-linearizes, such as IM and Half-IF.
The received signal mixes down to the frequency of the first IF, 45.1 MHz, and enters the IF circuitry.

6C.3-2 Theory of Operation

 RF Section

2.1.1 Intermediate Frequency (IF)

The Intermediate Frequency (IF) section of the portable radio consists of several sections including,
the high IF, the second LO, the second IF, and the IF IC chip. The first LO signal and the RF signal
mix to the IF frequency of 45.1 MHz, and then enters the IF portion of the radio.

The signal first enters the high IF, passes through a crystal filter, is then amplified by the IF amp, and
then passed through another crystal filter. The first crystal filter provides selectivity, second image
protection, and intermodulation protection. The amplifier provides approximately 16 dB of gain to the
signal. The signal then passes through the second crystal filter which provides further selectivity and
second image protection. The high IF has an approximate 3 dB bandwidth of 7 kHz for 20/25 kHz
models and 4 kHz for 12.5kHz models.

The filtered and amplified IF signal then mixes with the second local oscillator at 44.645 MHz. The
second LO uses an amplifier internal to the IF IC, an external crystal and some external chip parts.
The oscillator presents an approximate level of -15 dBm to the second IF mixer, internal to the IF IC.

The output of the mixing of the IF signal and the second LO produces a signal at 455kHz (second
IF). This signal is then filtered by external ceramic filters and amplified. It is then passed back to the
IF IC, sent to a phase-lock detector, and demodulated. The resulting detected audio output is then
sent to the ASFIC to recover the audio.

The IF IC also controls the squelch characteristics of the radio. With a few external parts the squelch
tail, hysteresis, attack and delay were optimized for the radio. The ASFIC allows the radio’s squelch
opening to be electronically adjusted.

2.2 Transmitter

The GP600 transmitters contain five basic circuits: a power amplifier, an antenna switch, a harmonic
filter, an antenna matching network, and a power control. Refer to the block diagram and the
schematic for more information.

The power amplifier used for transmitters is the LD-MOS module. The LD-MOS is capable of
supplying an output power at 6.8W with an input signal of 2mW and a supply voltage of 7.3V. The
power out can be varied by changing the biasing voltage at the first stage.

The antenna switch circuit consists of two PIN diodes (CR101and CR102), a pi network (C119,
L112, and part of C112), and at least one current limiting resistor R102 for UHF. In the transmit
mode, TX B+ is applied to the circuit to bias the diodes “on”. The shunt diode (CR102) shorts out the
receiver port, and the pi network, which operates as a quarter wave transmission line, transforms
the low impedance of the shunt diode to a high impedance at the input of the harmonic filter. In the
receive mode, the diodes are both off, and hence, there exists a low attenuation path between the
antenna and receiver ports.

The harmonic filter consists of part of C112, and L107, C113, L108, C114, L109, and C115. The
design of the harmonic filter for UHF is that of a Zolotarev design. This particular design is similar to
that of a Chebyshev filter except for a large amplitude first ripple (near dc). This type of filter has the
advantage that it can give greater attenuation in the stop-band for a given ripple level.

Another feature of this type of filter is that the coils tend to be smaller than with a Chebyshev design.

To optimize the performance of the transmitter and receiver into an antenna, a network is used to
match the antenna’s impedance to the harmonic filter. For UHF the network is made up of L111.
Note that, in order to measure the power out of the transmitter, one must remove the antenna and
screw in its place a special BNC-to-Phono adapter.

Theory of Operation 6C.3-3

RF Section

PTT

0dBm Power Antenna Harmonic Antenna

Module Switch Filter Match
From *
VCO
Buffer
VC
To Receiver 50 ohms

Power µP Serial
Ip R101 Control *Note: Connection to 50 ohms
Bus
can only be made by removing
antenna and screwing in its
Sw B+ place special BNC-to-Phono
adapter (5880166s01).

Figure 3-3 Transmitter Block Diagram.

The power control circuit consists of the networks associated with U151, Q156, Q151, Q152, Q155,
and U152. The Op Amp U151A-1 and Q156, along with resistor R101, make up a current-to-voltage
amplifier whose gain is mainly dependent upon the ratio of R179 to R153. The current to the final
stage of the power module is supplied through R101 (0.1 Ohms), which provides a voltage
proportional to the current drain. This voltage is amplified and applied to the input of U151B. The
resistors at the input of U151A-1 (R151, R152, R154, and R155) keep the voltages at the inputs of
U151A-1 below its maximum allowable. These resistors are 1% tolerance parts to minimize the error
produced at the emitter of Q156 resulting from the voltage offset at the input of U151A-1.

The voltage at the other input of the summing amp, U151A-2, is supplied from two DACs contained
within U152. These DACs are controlled by the microprocessor, and provide the reference voltage
for the control loop. One of the DACs, that connected to Pin 9 of U152, provides a coarse tune
voltage, while the other provides a fine tune voltage.

Since the output of the DACs is not zero when they are set to their lowest level, resistor R169 is
provided to bias up the minus input of the summing amp to compensate for the bias resulting from
the DACs.

The error voltage at the input of U151A-2 produces a voltage at its output, which is in turn applied to
the series pass transistor, Q152, through its driver, Q151. The voltage at the collector of Q152 is
applied to the controlled stage of the power module, which for UHF is the module’s second stage.
The feedback from the collector of Q152 to the emitter of Q151 through R166 is provided to keep the
two stages stable. Likewise, the feedback from the collector of Q152 to the minus input of the
summing amp is to keep the whole control loop stable.

The purpose of Q155 and its associated circuitry is to keep the control voltage on the module below
7.0 Volts, which is the maximum allowed for the UHF module.

The purpose of R173 was originally that of providing compensation to the control loop for changes in
the supply voltage, TX B+. However, experimentation has shown that this compensation is not really
required. Also, thermistor, R170, was provided to enable the shut back of the PA in the event that it
would get too hot. This has also been shown to not be required

6C.3-4 Theory of Operation

 Frequency Generation Circuitry

3.0 Frequency Generation Circuitry

The frequency generation circuitry is composed of two main IC’s, the Fractional-N synthesizer
(U201) and the VCO/Buffer IC (U251). Designed in conjunction to maximize compatibility, the two
IC’s provide many of the functions which normally would require additional circuitry. The block
diagram illustrates the interconnect and support circuitry used in the design. Refer to the schematic
for reference designator.

The supply for the synthesizer is from Regulated 5 Volts which also serves the rest of the radio. The
synthesizer in turn generates a superfiltered 5 Volts (*actually 4.65 Volts) which powers U251.

In addition to the VCO, the synthesizer must interface with the logic and ASFIC circuitry.
Programming for the synthesizer is accomplished through the data, clock, and chip enable lines
(pins 1, 2, and 35) from the microprocessor, U709. A serial stream of 98 bits is sent whenever the
synthesizer is programmed. A 5 volt dc signal from pin 2 indicates to the microprocessor that the
synthesizer is locked while unlock is indicated by a low voltage on this pin. Transmit modulation from
the ASFIC is applied to pin 8 of U201. Internally the audio is digitized by the Fractional-N and
applied to the loop divider to provide the low-port modulation. The audio is also run through an
internal attenuator for modulation balancing purposes before being outputted at pin 28 to the VCO. A
2.1 MHz clock for the AFIC is generated by the Fractional-N and is routed to pin 9 where it is filtered
and attenuated from 2.5 Volts to approximately 2 Volts.

3.1 Synthesizer

The Fractional-N synthesizer uses a 16.8 MHz crystal (Y201) to provide the reference frequency for
the system. The other reference oscillator components external to the IC are C205, C206, R207,
and CR203. The 16.8 MHz signal is divided down signal from the VCO. The loop filter, comprised of
R201, R202, R205, C201, C214, C215, and C216, provides the necessary d.c. steering voltage for
the VCO as well as filtering of spurious signals from the phase detector.

Data (5) 5
(U201) 2 Lock Det (to µP U709)
Clock (6) 6 FRACTIONAL_N
SYNTHESISER 11 Mod out (to ASFIC U701)
Cex (7) 7
28 Mod out (to VCO modulation)
Mod In (8) 8
Reg 5V 12,19,22,23,3
lout
GND (4,21,13,30) 4,21,13,30 29 2-Pole
Prescalar In ladapt Loop Filter
20 31
Crystal 1
14
Crystal 2 AUX3 Steering line
Reference
15 TRB 5
Oscillator Voltage
cp bias 1 1
27 Controlled
Filtered 5V Oscillator
26 18
cp bias 2 (U251)
32
VCP 10 9 16 23 4 2
Rx injection
Voltage V-mult 1 Warp
Multiplier V-mult 2 Tx injection

Figure 3-4 Synthesizer Block Diagram.

Theory of Operation 6C.3-5

Frequency Generation Circuitry

For achieving fast locking of the synthesizer, an internal adapt charge pump provides higher current
capability at pin 31 than when in the normal steady-state mode. Both the normal and adapt charge
pumps receive their supply from the voltage multiplier which is made up of C202, C203, C204,
C231, CR201, and CR202. By combining two 5 Volt square waves which are 180 out-of-phase along
with Regulated 5 Volts, a supply of approximately 12.6 Volts is available at pin 32 for the charge
pumps. The current for the normal mode charge pumps is set by R203. The pre-scaler for the loop is
internal to U201 with the value determined by the frequency band of operation.

3.2 VCO

The VCO (U251) in conjunction with the Fractional-N synthesizer (U201) generates rf in both the
receive and the transmit modes of operation. The TRB line (U251 pin 5) determines which oscillator
and buffer will be enabled. A sample of the rf signal from the enabled oscillator is routed from U251
pin 23, through a low pass filter, to the pre-scaler input (U201 pin 20). After frequency comparison in
the synthesizer, a resultant CONTROL VOLTAGE is received at the VCO. This voltage is a DC
voltage between 3 and 10 volts when the PLL is locked on frequency.

Lo Rf
Injection Low 10,11 Rx
Pass 2 Rx Rx Tank
Filter Buffer Osc Control
Voltage
Tx Rf
Injection Low 4 Tx
Tx Tx 15,16
Pass Tank
Attenuator Filter Buffer Osc
Filter

Audio
Tx/Rx/BS 5 Tx VCO In
Prescalar Switching TRB Mod
Buffer Network

AUX 3 (U201 pin 1)

VC GND VCC
23 13 1,20 3
Filter 5V (U201 pin 18)

Low
Prescalar RF out Pass Pre-In (U201 pin 20)
Filter

Figure 3-5 VCO Block Diagram.

In the receive mode, U251 pin 5 is grounded. This activates the receive VCO by enabling the receive
oscillator and the receive buffer of U251. The rf signal at U251 pin 2 is run through a low pass filter.
The rf signal after the low pass filter is the LO RF INJECTION and it is applied to the first mixer at
T2.

6C.3-6 Theory of Operation

 Frequency Generation Circuitry

During the transmit condition, PTT depressed, five volts is applied to U251 pin 5. This activates the
transmit VCO by enabling the transmit oscillator and the transmit buffer of U251. The rf signal at
U251 pin 4 is run through a low pass filter and an attenuator to give the correct drive level to the
input of the PA module (U101 pin 1). This rf signal is the TX RF INJECTION. Also in transmit mode,
the audio signal to be frequency modulated onto the carrier is received by the transmit VCO
modulation circuitry at AUDIO IN.

When a high impedance is applied to U251 pin 5, the VCO is operating in BATTERY SAVER mode.
In this case, both the receive and transmit oscillators as well as the receive, transmit, and pre-scaler
buffer are turned off. In the Fractional-N, the battery saver mode places the A/D and the modulation
attenuator in the off state. This mode is used to reduce current drain on the radio.

Theory of Operation 6C.3-7

Controller

4.0 Controller
The GP600 controller is an open architecture which consists of:
■ U709, Motorola 68HC11K1 microprocessor
■ U701, Audio Signalling Filter Integrated Circuit, ASFIC
■ U703, 1Kbyte EEPROM
■ U705, 128/256Kbyte OTP/FLASH ROM
■ U706, 8/32Kbyte Static RAM
■ U707, LCD Display Driver and
■ U704, 5V Voltage Regulator

U709, U703, U705, U706 and U707 are powered by U704. U701 is powered from a 5V Regulator
(U708) on Radio Module. In addition to the external memory devices, U709 has 768 bytes of RAM
and 640 bytes of EEPROM.

Reset

Tx. Limiter Ref

Carrier Tx. Attn Display
Filter and
Detect Audio & Splatter Driver
Pre-emp
Adapt VCO
Tone Attn To
Rx. Gen Synth
Audio Mod.In

Rx. Filter
Σ
2.1 Vol
Micro- MHz & De-emp
28 Attn Rx.
processor
Pin Sq. Audio
Conn. Out LCD
Attn
In

Data, Address
7.9488 and Control
MHz Clk
Keypad
Lock EE-
Detect PROM

Low Batt.
Monitor ROM/ RAM
SPI Bus FLASH
Vol
Sense
LED
5V From
5V Reg. Batt.

Push Channel
Button Switch
Reset

Figure 3-6 Controller Block Diagram.

6C.3-8 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.1 Functions

The microprocessor has two basic functions: interfacing with the outside world and controlling the
internal workings of the radio. The microprocessor interfaces directly with the keypad, side buttons,
PTT, rotary switch, battery low indicator, EXT PTT and volume sense. The microprocessor
constantly monitors these inputs and interprets any changes into commands that control the rest of
the radio. Some control functions it performs include loading the synthesizer with the desired RF
frequency, turning the RF PA on or off, enabling and disabling audio and data paths and generating
tones. Operations and operating conditions within the radio are interpreted by the microprocessor
and fed back to the operator as visible (the display) or audible (alert tone) indications of current
status.

4.2 Normal Operation

The regulated 5V output from U704 powers the microprocessor (U709) and the rest of the digital IC
except ASFIC (U701). The microprocessor’s clock is generated by the ASFIC, which has a built-in
programmable clock synthesizer.

4.3 Clock Synthesizer

Upon power-up and assuming that the ASFIC receives a proper 2.1MHz input on U701-P38 (which
comes from the transceiver board), the ASFIC outputs a 7.9488MHz CMOS square wave (0-5Vpp
logic) on U701-P30, which connects to the EXTAL input of the microprocessor, U709-P73. The
microprocessor operates at 1/4 of this frequency, which in this case computes to 1.9872MHz. In
particular, the E clock output (U709-P72) will be a 50% duty cycle square wave at this frequency.

4.4 Bus Operation

The microprocessor operates in expanded memory mode and executes firmware contained in OTP/
FLASH ROM, U705. The microprocessor uses a non-multiplexed address data bus, consisting data
lines D0 through D7 and address lines A0-A17. In addition, the microprocessor has integrated chip-
select logic so that external memories can be accessed without the need for external address
decoder gates. These chip-select signals are provided by U709-P28 and P29.

When the controller board is functioning normally, microprocessor’s address and data lines should
be toggling at CMOS logic levels. Specifically, the logic-high levels should be between 4.8 and 5.0V,
and the logic-low levels should be between 0 and 0.2V.

4.5 RAM

The on-chip 768 byte static RAM from U709 provides some scratch-pad memory, with the bulk of it
coming from the external 8 or 32Kbyte SRAM, U706. External SRAM accesses are indicated by the
U709-P28. Normally SRAM is accessed less often than the OTP/FLASH ROM, U705; i.e. the
number of transitions per second on U705 chip select (pin 30) should be 5-15 times higher than
those on U706 pin 20.

Theory of Operation 6C.3-9

Controller

4.6 EEPROM

The radio codeplug storage is provided by U709 internal 640 byte EEPROM, with an additional 1K
byte of memory space provided by external EEPROM, U703. There are three basic types of
codeplug information: information on the trunked system on which the radio is authorized to operate;
information on the conventional system, which is either of the repeater or talk-around type on which
the radio is authorized to operate, and information on the configuration and tuning of the radio itself.
Tuning information is normally located in the internal EEPROM of U709.

4.7 SPI Interface

The microprocessor communicates to several ICs and modules through a dedicated on-chip serial-
peripheral-interface (SPI) port which consists of transmit data line MOSI (U709-P1), receive data
line MISO (U709-P80), and clock line SCK (U709-P2). In addition, each IC that can be accessed by
the microprocessor using the SPI has a read/write select line associated with it. The ICs or circuits
and their associated select lines are:
■ EEPROM (U703) with select line U709-P3
■ ASFIC (U701) with select line U709-P34
■ LCD Driver (U707) with select line U709-P23
■ SRAM (U706) and OTP/FLASH ROM (U705) with select line U709-P33
■ Transceiver board Synthesizer (U201) with select line U709-P35
■ Transceiver board DAC IC (U152) with select line U709-P26

The LCD Driver uses the master out/slave in (MOSI) line to send data to the display driver IC, and
the master in/slave out (MISO) line to send data back to the microprocessor (U709). Note, however,
that the keypad (or any other SPI device) can never initiate display data; the microprocessor is at all
times the SPI master device. Thus the MOSI line and MISO line are always in the master
configuration.

4.8 LED Control

The bi-colour LED on the top of the radio is indirectly activated by SPI of U709 via the DAC IC
(U152) on Transceiver Board. When either input to the dual NPN transistor (U410) is at logic high,
the corresponding output pin (pin 6 for the green LED, pin 3 for the red) should be at approximately
4.3 Vdc. Note that it is possible to have both LED outputs on simultaneously, in which case the LED
emits a yellow/orange light.

4.9 Audio & Data Circuitry

The transmit and receive audio paths are disabled in the standby mode and selectively enabled by
the microprocessor when the radio transmits or receives a signal. Also, there are minor differences
in the functioning of both paths depending on whether an internal or external (accessory)
microphone/speaker is being used. The radio constantly monitors the received data path for control-
channel data in trunking operation or sub-audible data in conventional operation.

6C.3-10 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.10 External PTT Sense Circuits

On connecting an external MIC through connector J3, external PTT sense transistor Q408 switches
“ON” when the external PTT switch is closed. Q408 collector voltage is monitored by U709-P4.
When collector voltage is logic “HIGH”, the microprocessor configures the radio for transmit mode.
In PTT equipped accessories, the PTT switch is series connected with the external MIC element.

4.11 MIC Amplifier

MIC audio from internal MIC MK401 is coupled through C429, L404, J3 and L403 to the MIC buffer
circuit U405-1. External MIC plug insertion mechanically disconnects the internal MIC. External MIC
audio is coupled through L403 to the MIC buffer input. The unity gain buffer will route the MIC audio
into MIC IN (U701-P7) through flex and connectors J200 and J700. Inside the ASFIC, the MIC audio
is amplified, filtered to eliminate components outside the 300-3000Hz voice band, pre-emphasized,
and then limited. The limited MIC audio is then routed through a summer, which is used to add in PL
or DPL sub-audio band modulation, and then to a splatter filter to eliminate high frequency spectral
components generated by the limiter. After the splatter filter, the audio is routed to the 8 bit
modulation attenuators, which are tuned in the factory of the field to set the proper amount of FM
deviation. The TX audio emerges from the ASFIC at U701-P55 is dc coupled and applied through
flex and connectors J700 and J200 to the synthesizer (U201) pin 8.

4.12 TX Data Circuits

There are four major types of transmit data: sub-audible data (PL/DPL/Connect Tone) that gets
summed with voice, high speed data for trunking control channel communication, DTMF data for
telephone communication in trunked and conventional systems, and MDC data for use in Motorola
proprietary MDC systems. The deviation levels of the latter three types are tuned by a 5-bit digital
attenuation inside the ASFIC. For each data type and each band split, there is a distinct set of tuning
values that are programmed into the ASFIC before the data is generated and transmitted.

4.13 Sub-Audible Data (PL/DPL)

Sub-audible data is composed of low-frequency PL and DPL waveforms for conventional operation
and connect tones for trunked voice channel operation. (The trunking connect tone is simply a PL
sine wave at a higher deviation level than PL in a conventional system). Although it is referred to as
“sub-audible data”, the actual frequency spectrum of these waveforms may be as high as 250Hz,
which is audible to the human ear. However, the radio receiver filters out any audio below 300Hz, so
these tones are never heard in the actual system.

Only one type of sub-audible data can be generated by U701 at any one time. The process is as
follows: using the SPI, the microprocessor programs the ASFIC (U701) to set up the proper low-
speed data deviation and select the PL or DPL filters. The microprocessor then generates a square
wave from U705-P6 which strobes the ASFIC PL_CLK (U701-P20). For encode input at twelve
times the desired data rate. (For example, for a PL frequency of 103Hz, the frequency of the square
wave at U701-P20 would be a 1236Hz). This derives a tone generator inside U701, which generates
a staircase approximation to a PL sine wave or DPL data pattern. This internal waveform is then low-
pass filtered and summed with voice or data. The resulting summed waveform then appears on
U701-P55 (VCO_ATN), where it is sent to the transceiver board as previously described for transmit
audio.

Theory of Operation 6C.3-11

Controller

4.14 High-Speed Data

High-speed data refers to the 3600 baud data waveforms (ISWS AND OSWS) used in a trunking
system for high-speed communication between the radio and the central controller. To generate an
ISW, the microprocessor (U709) first programs the ASFIC (U701) to the proper filter and gain
settings. It then begins strobing U701-P54 (Trunking Clock In) with a square wave (from U709-P5) at
the same baud rate as the data. The output waveform from 5-3-2 State Encoder of U701 is then fed
to the post-limiter summer block and then the splatter filter. From that point it is routed through the
mode attenuator and then out of the ASFIC to the transceiver board via VCO_ATN (U701-P55).

4.15 DTMF Data

DTMF data is a dual-tone waveform used during phone interconnect operation. They are divided into
low-group and high-group tones. The high-group tone is generated by U709-P5 strobing U701-P54
at six times the tone frequency for tones less than 1440Hz, or twice the frequency for tones greater
than 1440Hz. The low-group tone is generated by U709-P7 strobing U701-P53 (DTMF Clock) at six
times the tone frequency. Inside U701 the low-group and high-group tones are summed (with the
amplitude of the high-group tone being approximately 2dB greater than that of the low-group tone)
and then pre-emphasized before being routed to the summer and splatter filter. The DTMF
waveform then follows the same path as was described for high speed data.

4.16 MDC Data

The MDC signal follows exactly the same path as the DTMF high-group tone. MDC data utilizes
MSK modulation, in which a logic zero is represented by one cycle of a 1200Hz sine wave, and a
logic one is 1.5 cycles of an 1800Hz sine wave. To generate the data, the microprocessor (U709)
first programs the ASFIC (U701) to the proper filter and gain settings. It then begins strobing U701-
P54 with a square wave (from U709-P5) at the same baud rate as the data. The output waveform
from U701 is fed to the post-limiter summer block and then the splatter filter. From that point it is
routed through the mode attenuator and then out of ASFIC to the transceiver board via VCO_ATN
(U701-P55).

4.17 RX Audio Processing and Digital Volume Control

The radio’s RF circuit are constantly producing an output at the Detected Audio line. Whenever the
radio is in trunked standby mode, it is processing data from the control channel; while in
conventional standby mode, it is always monitoring the squelch line and/or sub-audible data. The
detected audio from the transceiver board enters the controller board at connector J700 pin 4. In
addition to the detected audio line, the transceiver board also provides a squelch noise from U51-
P30 into the ASFIC squelch-detect circuitry via U701-P56. When the microprocessor is satisfied that
it has received the proper data or signal type for unsquelching, it sets up the receive audio path and
sends data to U701 to do the same within.

The detected audio will enter U701 through RX IN (pin 57) and PL IN (pin 63) for further processing.
Inside the IC, the signal first passes through a low-pass filter to remove any frequency components
above 3000Hz and then a high-pass filter to strip off any sub-audible data below 300Hz. Next, the
recovered audio passes through a de-emphasis filter to reduce the effects of FM noise. Finally, the
IC amplifies the audio and passes it through the 8-bit programmable attenuator whose level is set
depending on the value of the volume control. The microprocessor (U709) programs the value of the
8-bit attenuator in accordance with the voltage sensed at the volume potentiometer, which is
connected to U709-P48. This pin is one of the eight channels of U709’s 8 bit A/D convertor. After
passing through the 8-bit digital attenuator, the audio goes to a buffer amplifier and then exits at
U701-P66, where it is routed to the Audio power amplifier circuit in the transceiver board.

6C.3-12 Theory of Operation

 Controller

4.18 Audio Power Amplifier

Resistor R466 sets the input impedance to U409-P2 of the audio power amp. The audio PA circuit is
a bridged-tied-load (BTL) configuration with fixed gain of 40dB, developing 500mW (rated audio
power) output at less than 5% harmonic distortion into the 16 ohm internal speaker LS401 with
nominal 7.5Vdc battery supply. Maximum audio power output is greater than 1.2 watts.

4.19 Audio PA Muting and Output Protection

PNP transistor Q410, the audio PA power switch, driven by NPN darlington transistor Q411, the PA
mute amp, controls Vcc supply to Audio PA U409-P1. U701-P5 is connected to Q411 base,
controlling audio PA Vcc supply. Resistors R489 and R490, PNP transistor Q412 and the current
sense circuit monitor current supplied to audio PA U409-P1. Worst case audio PA current (at 9Vdc
battery voltage, maximum volume and full system deviation) does not exceed 450mA at the nominal
16 ohm load. Resistor R488 and capacitor C461 provide an RC time delay for U405-2, a monostable
multivibrator circuit. A 2.5Vdc reference voltage is fed to U405-2-P6. On radio power-up, and in
normal operation U405-P7 monostable multivibrator output is logic “LO” pulling Q411 emitter to Vee
with the audio PA controlled by U701-P5. Should U409-P5 and/or U409-P8 become shorted to each
other or to the ground (Vee), current consumption exceeds 500 mA (approximately) and Q412
collector. When U405-2-P5 voltage rises higher than the U405-2-P6 reference voltage (rise time is
less than 50 usec), U405-2 is triggered and U405-2-P7 dc output voltage is switched to 4Vdc,
effectively biasing Q411 into cut-off and turning off the audio PA power switch Q410. U405-2-P7
remains in this state for 15 msec, then reset to logic “LO” state. Average power dissipation in the
audio PA circuit components is helped to a low level by the low duty cycle (less than 0.3%) of the
audio PA protection circuit. The cycle repeats until the audio PA output short is removed.

4.20 Receive Data Circuits

The ASFIC (U701) decodes all receive data, which includes PL, DPL, low-speed trunking, MDC,
and high-speed trunking data. The “decode” process for each data type typically involves low pass
or band pass filtering, signal amplification, and then routing the signal to a comparator, which
outputs a logic zero or one signal. The detected audio from the transceiver board is routed to U701-
P57 and P63 through coupling cap C435. Inside U701, the data is filtered according to the data type
(HS data or LS data, then hard-limited to a 0-5V digital level. The high-speed limited data output
(MDC and trunking high-speed) appears at U701-P51, where it connects to U709-P11. The low
speed limited data output (PL, DPL and trunking low-speed) appears at U701-P4, where it connects
to U709-P10.

4.21 Alert Tone Circuits

When the microprocessor needs to give the operator feedback (for a good key press or for a bad key
press) or radio status (trunked system busy, low battery condition, phone call, circuit failures), it
sends an alert tone to the speaker. It does so by sending data to U701, which sets up the audio path
to the speaker for alert tones. The alert tone itself can be generated in one of two ways: internally by
the ASFIC, or externally using the microprocessor and the ASFIC. The allowable internal alert tones
are 300, 900 and 1800Hz. For external alert tones, the microprocessor can generate any tone within
the 100-3000Hz audio band. This is accomplished by the microprocessor toggling the output line
U709-P7, which is also the same line used to generate low-group DTMF data. Inside the ASFIC, this
signal is routed to the external input of the alert tone generator. The output of the generator is
summed into the audio chain just after the RX audio de-emphasis block. The tone is then amplified
and filtered before passing through the 8-bit digital volume attenuator. The tone exits at U701-P66,
then is routed to the audio PA circuitry in the transceiver board.

Theory of Operation 6C.3-13

Controller

6C.3-14 Theory of Operation

 Table of Contents

Chapter 6C.4
PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists
Table of Contents

Description Page
UHF (438-470MHz) Diagrams and Parts Lists
Controller PCB Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Controller Schematic Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
RF PCB Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
RF Overall Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
RF (Receiver Module) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
RF (Synthesizer) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
RF (Transmitter Module) Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
RX-FE Schematic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-i

Table of Contents

6C.4-ii PCB/Schematic Diagrams and Parts Lists

 Controller Board

DS702 DS701

DS704 DS703
J701 1
34

32 17
15 14 33 16
R799
C721
S01 S02 S03 S04
R781 C745
U706 U707
R755 C787 C746

R700 C700

VR707
48 1
49 64 TP7

C754
R790

C781
R711
R713

C744
CR707 S13 S14 S15 S16
Q704 R710
28 1
C719
C758
R787

Q703 16 Q700
Q705 17 C720
4 R763 C777 C786
5 U705

C718
R712
R753
U703

C716
C717
8 1 TP4 32 1
C711 S07 S08 S09 S10
R726

80 61 C407 H8 B8
R403

1 60 6 4 J7 A7
U704
1 3 R786
U701
C763
C406 C765
R725

R764

U709 S05 S06 S11 S12

TP2 J2 A2
H1 B1
R754
TP1
R756
C738
C761

R751
C707

C737 C708
C731
C743

20 41 C769
21 C733 R705 C710
40
28
C741
C732

2
C747
C435

C742
R468

Q702

R752
J700
1 27

Controller Board Controller Board

Component Side 8404599J03 GEPD5478-1 Solder Side 8404599J03 Solder
GEPD5479-1
Side
Component Side

Controller Board
PCB No. 8404599J03

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-1

 Controller Schematic Diagram

Controller Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-3

 Controller Board- 8404599J03

Controller Board-
8404599J03

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

capacitor, fixed: pF +/-5%; 50V C754 2113743E20 100nF 10%

(unless otherwise stated)
C758 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C406 2113741F49 10000
C761 2113740F39 33
C407 2311049A40 TANT 2.2µF +/-10%
C763 2113741F49 10000
C435 2113743E20 100NF 10%
C765 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C700 2113743E07 22 nF
C769 2113740F55 150
C707 2113741F17 470
C777 2311049A07 TANT 1.0µF +/-10%
C708 2113741F49 10000
C781 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C710 2311049J11 TANT 4.7µF +/-10%
C786 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C711 2311049A07 TANT 1.0µF +/-10%
C787 2113743E20 100nF 10%
C716 2113743F08 0.22µF
resistor, fixed: ohm +/-5%; 1/8W
C717 2160521G37 100nF (unless otherwise stated)

C718 2113743E20 100nF 10% R403 0662057A97 100k

C719 2160521G37 100nF R468 0662057A73 10k

C720 2113741A45 10000 R700 0662057A97 100k

C721 2311049A01 0.1µF R705 0662057A89 47k

C731 2113743K15 0.1µF R710 0662057A89 47k

C732 2113743K15 0.1µF R725 0662057A93 68k

C733 2113740F55 150 R726 0662057A85 33k

C737 2113740F55 150 R751 0662057B47 0

C738 2113740F55 150 R752 0662057B47 0

C741 2113740F55 150 R753 0662057A73 10K

C742 2113740F55 150 R754 0662057B47 0

C743 2113740F55 150 R755 0662057A73 10k

C744 2113740F55 150 R756 0662057A73 10k

C745 2113740F55 150 R763 0662057A65 4700

C746 2113740F55 150 R764 0662057A73 10k

C747 2113740F55 150 R781 0662057C39 33

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-5

Controller Board- 8404599J03

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part no. Ref Part no.

R786 0662057A97 100K Flex, PCB:

R787 0662057A83 27K J701 8404628J02 Flex Heat Seal

R790 0662057A81 22K Non-Referenced Parts:

R799 0662057C39 33 6104617J01 Lightpipe
Connector:
7204616J01 LCD
J700 0904621J02 Connector, ZIF,
Controller 8404599J03 Pcb, Controller

Light Emitting Diode:

DS701 4805729G90 LED, green

DS702 4805729G90 LED, green

DS703 4805729G90 LED, green

DS704 4805729G90 LED, green

Diode, Transistor:

CR707 4813833C02 Diode Dual 70V '5B'

COMM CATH

Q700 4880214G02 NPN, MMBT3904

Q702 4880214G02 NPN, MMBT3904

Q703 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

Q704 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

Q705 4805128M16 PNP, MMBT3906

VR707 4813830A27 Zener 14V 5% 225mW

Integrated Circuit:

U701 5105835U41 CC CONT 519/W52

F83G ASFIC

U703 5105462G76 EEPROM

U704 5180633C01 5V REGULATOR W/

RESET

U705 5105625U73 ROM

U706 5102463J27 RAM (32K X 8)

U707 5102463J21 MSM6606 DISPLAY

DRIVER

U709 5102226J34 MC68HC11K1CFU4

MICROPROCESSOR
(16 MHz)

6C.4-6 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board

CL6 CL7 CL8 CL11

3 4 3 4 5

C228

C212
C227
C233 Y201T L253 4 R256 R262 C33 L53
L11 Y51B

R252
C282
L204 2 Q251 5 4 CF51 CF52 6 R460 3
3 C283

C56

C78
C30
T2 C28 L55 1 2

C455
CR203 1 1 2

C258
R255 2

R253
C224 L203
L255 C272 1 2 3

Y51A
R54
C232 C205
C268 L9 C58

C59
C29
L258 8 30 5 1
R254 L260 5 5

C206

R207
C217 C279 C267

C801
R55
CR255 C55
C281 CR2 U51

C219
L262 J6

R205
C209
L52

C75
C278

C215
L201 C257 R258 C266
4 C73
1
C126 C259
C286 C125 L258 L259 3 2 1 R51 C79 12 23

C204

Y53
C265 L261 SW401

C74
R64
CR105 T1

C269
4

C51
L51 L58 C68 2

C63
CL5 C271
C270 4 5
CR106
C66 C69 R57
C67
CR103
CR104

R105
R106 U252 8 1
C127 8 5

C418
R105
1

C419
R447 6 5 4 3 2

C497

C498

C116
C425
U708

L111
Q408 1 4

C424
R448
C421 J1
C802 R452 R169
C452 R503
R451
U101 1 2
4 1

C464
L403 R170 J2 3
4 1 C800
C461
U405

R173
L710 U409 1 2 3 4 C123 5 6 7 4
L404

R702
C499
R488
5 5 8 C429
8

C409
C124
L113
C430 C102 C107
PB403 PB401 PB402 RF Board
CL4 CL3 CL2 Component Side

SH101 SH100

R804
R801

R803
R802
C57
CR405

VR704 L54

C228
C454

C208
C789

R212

C207
C275

C236
C273 C210

C211
CR251
CR51 C456 C251 C254
R60

R263

R409
R411
C70

JU51
R52

L252 C252 C253 C255

C62

C54 R251 R211

R410
C457
R415
C476

R204
C82

L717 17 21 C223

C284
R53 C77 24 17

R203 R202
R408
16 22 L251 L254 25 16 C472
R68
R497

C61

C71 C53 R206 R215

C235
C60

C34

R414
R67

Q51
24 R261
C13

R424
C474 L10 U251 1 U201 C202 R417
C83

C256 C473
R260 C466
C87 C85 CR201

C237
DS401

C263
U410 R66 10 4 L256 L267 C216 32 9 C467
C64

R5 C468

R416
3 4
C86
R413

C203
R58 9 1 8
5 R201 C222

R264
C238
R412

C261

CR253

C221

C220
C80

1 6 Q405 C262 L286

C201

C260
R257

C264
L257
C475 C436

C276 1
C459

C280 C285 CR202

C81

VR401 C37 R162 C214

C229 C218 C231
C156

C36 LOCKDET

R193

C158
Q153
C410

C460 C443 R438 C157 C165

C230 R216
R158 LS
C193 C151
8 5 R167
R6 22 24 1 4 C194 SYNLE
J200

R494
L406 R159 C199 R168
R160

C159
U151A
C154

3 R102 C119 Q151 21 5 SRDATA

C480

R450

R449
C426
C118

L405 R161 R166

C437
1 CR102 C120 1 4
C153 R157
U152 R489
2 C101 SRCLOCK
C105

C469
J3 C163 C152 17 9
28
C111 Q154

R469
Q410
C115

R490
R155

C121 R154 C438 DACLE

Q152 16 10
L104

L112 R101

R507
R172

R171
L106

C428

R466 C479
R153
C113

R156
CR101

C128

Q155

L109 Q156
C481

4 C112 L105 L101 R179 C427 Q412 Q411

L102

R174

R467
C441
C103 CL9
5 C166 R151
C122

R496
R175

6
C164

L108 L107
C442

C114
RF Board
C110
C108

C109
C106
C162

R152
L103 C104 4 3 2 1 J5
SB+ GND RESET
Solder Side

RF Board
PCB No. 8480473Z01

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-7

 RF Schematic Diagram

BATTER
GRAPHICS ONLY
0180702489 BATT FILTER BOARD
* CONNECTION VIA CHASSIS
R497 SCI
SCI

CONN_BPLUS
470 refer to R460 C3
SW402-1 39
L710 SW_ONOFF

J?
5V SWB+ TXB+ EN_BIAS 5V SWB+ 5R THERMAL FUSE
F1
390nH U708 P/O VOL
C421 L1 L2 4A
REG_8PIN .47uf
8 CHG+
VOUT 1 CR405 C1 C2 C4
6 VIN
5V_TAP SENSE 2 NU 39 39
7 4
C419 5 FEEDBACK GND 3
.018uF ERROR SHUT SWB+
DOWN (SOURCE) CHG-
5V SWB+ TXB+ 5V SWB+ 5R
C418 J200
(SOURCE)
10uf CONN_89982-28
EN_BIAS SQATTNIN 5V 1 SWB+
2
GND
DETAUDIO 3 SQATTNIN
TRANSMITTER RX_IN RX_IN RECEIVER 4 DETAUDIO
RSSI 5 RSSI
CHAIN CHAIN 6
RX_INJ ADAPT
ADAPT 7 LOCKDET
8 SYNLE
9 MODIN
CLK RESET DACLETX_INJ 10
SB1
11 SB2
5V 12 ROT1
13 ROT2
(SOURCE FROM ASFIC) 14
2.5V
15 5V
16 MICIN
17 SRDATA
RX_INJ 5V 18 RXAUDIO
LOCKDET 19 GCB1
C497 20 VOL
CLK RESET DACLE NU 21
SYNLE R447 PTT
22 EXTPTTSENSE
SB1 SB2 2.5V 5V 5V 23
MODIN NU SCI
TX_INJ C425 VOLUME 24 SRCLOCK
C424 NU 25
DATA SRDATA PORT DACLE
SYNTHESIZER 26
L717 VOL SENSE 27
RESET
GND
CLK SRCLK NU .39uH 28
C480 R460-2 XX 2.1MHZ
XX
NU C789 VR704
R448 R450
2.1 MHZ 2.1 MHZ 100pf 6.8V
SW_ONOFF XX
0 NU
U405-1 PTT DATA CLK DACLE RESET 2.1MHZ
OPAMP_4PIN N2 C802
SWB+ 1 2 NU
C426 C427 L403
R507 R489 R490 3 J3
1000 2.7 2.7 N1
4 N3 MMBT3906 390nH EXT_MIC-SPKR
1/8W 1/8W SWB+ .22uf .22uf C481 S2
2 N4 R449 C428 R451 150pf
100K 150pf R494 3 Q408 2200 S3
EXT MIC
1 100K
Q412 2 MIC FILTER 1 S1
MMBT3906 C438
3 C461 4.7uf 2.5V C410 J5
1 3 C409 VR401 C436
2 R452 150pf CONN_4PIN
C464 180K 150pf 10V 150pf 1 MK401
.1uf 3 Q410 R503
5V INT MIC
R488 .1uf M41L03 1 2
8 N4 330 C452
220K Q411 C498 L404
5N3 7N1 R496 2 4.7uf
MMBTA13 150pf 390nH
330
SHIELDS AND BUTTERFLY CLIPS 6N2 U405-2
OPAMP_4PIN
C429
2.5V 4700pf 3
R702 LS401
L405 EN_BIAS 2000 INT SPKR
4 16 ohm
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 390nH
AUDIO AMPLIFIER C499 C430 C442
CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL R467 150pf NU J4
U409 150pf EXT_MIC-SPKR
10 S2
CL11 CL9 CL8 CL7 CL6 CL5 CL4 CL3 CL2 TDA7052
1 5
Vp OUTPUT1 C441 S3
.1uf EXT SPKR
C437 R469 2 8 L406
INPUT OUTPUT2 S1

GND0
GND1
1800 390nH

NC0
NC1
.47uf C469 C443
SH101 SH100 SH103 SH104 SH105 47pf R466 C479 1000pf
4700 470pf 3 6 4 7
SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1
NC NC
1 1 1 1 1

5V
ROT1
R801 R802 R803 ROT2
C801 10K 10K R409
NU 10K R804
SW_FREQ_16POS 10K 43K
SB1 SB2 PTT SW401 8 R408
PC3
PC2 4
C466 C467 2 20K
C468 PC1 R411
PC0 1
C0 C1
150pf 150pf 150pf 43K
C475 C459 C474 C456 C454 C457 C455 R410
C460
150pf 150pf 150pf 150pf .01uf .01uf .01uf .01uf
R424 R416 R417 20K
100 100 100 C476
150pf R414 R415
C473 C472 510K 510K
150pf 150pf
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF OVERALL CIRCUITS

PMLE4073A UHF (438-470MHZ) 12.5KHZ RF BOARD

1 2 1 2 1 2
PB403 GEPD5554
PB401 PB402

MON OPT2 PTT

SW_TACTILE SW_TACTILE SW_TACTILE

RF Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-9

 RF Schematic Diagram

FIRST MIXER L52

C34 C37
.47uH

.01uf NU
2
1,2 R51 L51 Y51A
FRONT END RECEIVER MODULE R5 1 T2
3 4 45.1MHZ
5V C53
U252 5,6 .15uH INSTPAR
160 2 22pf 1 3
6 8 XFMR C30
C13 C51
MODRF_6PIN 150pf VOLT 150pf
1 5 L53 C77
CR2-1 51
1 2 3 4 5 6 1.2uH 3pf
R6 T1 L11 L9 L10 82pf 2
4 3
CR2-2 5R
RX_IN VOLT 27nH 15nH .15uH
10 C36 2
XFMR C28 C29
4.3pf 5 7 7,8 C33
C119 10pf 12pf
5 1 1.5pf
NU
4
3,4

RX_INJ

4F(N) 4D(W) 6F(N) 4E(W)

C55 R55 455KHZ 455KHZ
5R 455kHz 455kHz FILTER_6POLE
FILTER
.1uf 100 1 3 1 5
R54

2.5VDC

2.5VDC
2000
R52

33K C61
2
C82 CF51 2 3 4 CF52
R67
2.9VDC JU51 1500pf INSTPAR

3.8VDC
CR51 INSTPAR
4 3 36 35 33 32
6800

2ND_IF_OUT
.1uf

IF_AMP_IN

IF_AMP_OUT

FIL_CAP_OUT
LIM_IN

FIL_CAP_IN
C56 NU
3 JUMPER
Q51 20pf C59
C78 0.75VDC 6 PPC_AMP_IN
C54 MMBR941 1INSTPAR3
0.7VDC
1
C57 L54 0 L55 C58 .1uf 1.5VDC 5
15pf NPN NU NU Y51B INSTPAR NU PPC_AMP_OUT 31 2.0VDC
R53 2
12K 45.1MHZ DEMOD_OUT
2
C60
.1uf .47uf
8 IF_IN C62
AUDIO_IN 29
3.0VDC 1
GND 2.4VDC
13 28 2.5VDC
A+_B+ DETAUDIO
SWB+ 14 DRIVE AUDIO_OUT
C80
C75 4.4VDC 7 LO_IN 23 2.4VDC NU
SQ_LIM_OUT
C73 3.9pf
2 2.6VDC 10 C63
OSC_OUT
20 2.4VDC
R66 13pf C74 R64 3.4VDC 9
U51 SQ_ATTEN_IN
45MHz OSC_FB IFIC
820 Y53 36pf 5600 51pf
27 22
44.645 5R T_R ADAPT ADAPT
1
2 5.0VDC(UNSQ)
VCC1 0VDC(SQ)
C79 15 C87
SQ_OUT 5.0VDC(UNSQ)
16pf 12 150pf
VCC2 0VDC(SQ)
2.4VDC
17 18
5V VCC3 FAST_SQ
L58
INSTPAR C71 C70 34

PCC_2_SU

RSSI_OUT
VCC4 R68

SQ_TAIL
10uf .1uf SQ_NOISE 30 SQATTNIN

FILTER
C81

SQ_IN
3.7VDC 1000
25

ICO
RSSI_OUT_2
C83 C85 C86 R60
.1uf 16 19 11 26 24 150pf 150pf 150pf 130K
3-5VDC

RSSI
R58
3-5VDC C66 13K C64
C67 .1uf
4.7uf 150pf
C69 C68 R57
3.3uf .039uf 130K
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF RECEIVER CHAIN

0.5-3.0VDC

0.65VDC
PMLE4073A UHF (438-470 MHz) 12.5 KHZ RF BOARD

GEPD5551

RF (Receiver Module) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-11

 RF Schematic Diagram

R256
RX_INJ
1500 C283
C282 3
470pf
Q251 150pf
1 NPN R262
MMBR941
2 120

R252

10K
R255
11K C260
C272 R257 C280 C231
5.6pf C261 5.6pf
5.1pf C263 C285 R264 C238 C237 5V
30K CR253 150pf 100
C267 R258 150pf 1.8pf .01uf 100pf 100pf C202
R260 L256 C262 C264
100 C204 L286 5.0VDC (LOCKED)
150pf C266 FILT5V 470nH .01uf 0VDC (UNLOCKED)
150pf L257 220 8.2pf 6.8pf
C268 C278 1000nH
470nH L267 4.7uf CR202 CR201
.22uf L258 56nH C222 C286
L259 C203 C228 LOCKD
1000pf 34.4nH NU C219
6

9
390nH L262 L255 .01uf 150pf
L260 150pf
VCC
NC1

NC2

E1B

E1A
LA1
FILT5V 1000pf 12.6VDC
27nH 15nH 390nH SYNLE
2 11 C256 L201
RX B1 R205 3-10VDC
C269 C259 390nH
L261

32

V_MULT_1 10
4 12 150pf 3300 C216 R202

V_MULT_2 9

7
TX BI1 C265 150pf C215
TX_INJ .1uf 2200
8.2nH 5600pf

LOCK
VCP

CEX
150pf .1uf 3-10VDC 29
C271 C270 22 U251 13 L254 SL
I_OUT
NU NU NC4 VC 31 I_ADAPT 8 2.5VDC
C253 C255 47nH R201 C201 MOD_IN MODIN
VCOBIC 82 NU T1
24 14 R261 4 11 2.5VDC R206 R215
NC5 BI2 30pf 9.1pf 1 GND FREQ_OUT 2.1MHZ
220 C284
L251 1pf L253 CR251 3-10VDC 13 12 2200 1000
1 15 C279 390nH C254 27.5nH C214 GND U201 DC_5V_REF_OSC 5V C223
R216
C218
GND2 B2 .22uf 1uf 24K
GND1

3pf 30 FRACTN 14 2.0VDC 33pf 1000pf

RBY

TRB

NC3

GND XTAL_1
E2B

E2A
LA2

PS

28 MOD_OUT IC 15 C205 C230

R254 C217
XTAL_2 220pf
L268 .1uf
19

21

23

20

18
17

16

10K 1.2VDC
5

2.5VDC 1 16
AUX_3 WARP 2

DC_5V_REF_DIV
C275 C252 390nH

DC_5V_PRESC
20 PRE_IN 17 C232 Y201T
5.6pf C257 R253 C258 C235 10.0uf 4.65VDC R211 C206 R207

SUP_F_OUT
SUP_CAP 16.8MHz

DC_5V_SRL
CR255 47pf NU

SRL_CLK
150pf 1500 NU .018uf 2200

SRL_DATA
47K

27 CP_BIAS1

CP_BIAS2

19 SUP_F_IN
150pf R263 1

TEST_1
TEST_2
39K L252 C207 C233
R251 0.7VDC(R)

GND
390nH C251 4.7uf

1.5VDC
27K C281 4.2VDC(T)
5.6pf
150pf FILT5V 6.8pf

26
18
21

23

22
24
25
6
5
FILT5V

3
CR203
C209 NC NC
C273 150pf
150pf
C224
L204 150pf
C211 .22uf
12nH
C227 C226 4.7uf C229
C276 NU R212
11pf L203 NU R203 R204
.01uf 390nH 75K 75K

(SOURCE) 4.65VDC
FILT5V
C210 C212 C236
4.7uf 1000pf 150pf

C208
4.7uf C220 C221 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF SYNTHESIZER
150pf 150pf
PMLE4073A UHF (438-470 MHz) 12.5 KHZ RF BOARD
5V CLK DATA
GEPD5550

RF (Synthesiser) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-13

 RF Schematic Diagram

C120 CR102
RX_IN
C109
150pf C118 33pf TXB+
R102
47pf 330

C123 L103 L101 C102 C110

270nH 270nH 1uf 150pf
4T 150pf C104
L112
INSTPAR
L113
33pf
HARMONIC FILTER
NU 4 2
VS2
VS1
J2 C121 L109 L108 L107 C116
C103 3
RF_JACK 4T 4T 4T CR101 VCONT R105
1 6 1
RF_OUT RF_IN TX_INJ
1 S1 INSTPAR INSTPAR INSTPAR 5
150pf VS3 39
2 150pf 150pf R104 R106
2 S2 C115 C113 L106
U101 VS4 NU NU
C114 C112
3 3.9pf 12pf MHW707
L111 12pf 8.2pf 270nH
3 S3
J1 INSTPAR TXB+
ANTENNAE

L102 C106
(SOURCE) C111 L104 C107 C108
C117 150pf BEAD .018uf .018uf
270nH
NU L105 150pf
BEAD

C105
10uf C164
5V
R101
150pf 3
0.1 R174
R153 1W C122 C124 C162 R151 Q155
SWB+ C158 C101 22 56.2K 1
NU 20pf 150pf MMBT3904
Q154 .01uf 4.7uf 1% 100K
TO U51-PIN 13,14 NPN
M41L03
C128 R175
2 3 2 6200
SWB+ SENSE HI 2
Q405 R438
1 .047uf
R161 MMBT3906 R155
3300 SENSE LO
680
56.2K
1 5R 3 1%
1
C125 R154 R152
SOURCE VDD
3 NU 100K 100K
U152 C126 4.52VDC(HI)
1% 1%
Q153 .47uf 2.00VDC(LO)
SWB+ MMBT3904 1 22 11
CLK DAC2
NPN 24 9
RESET DAC1
C199 21 3 R171 C153
150pf EN BIAS_EN .047uf
C156 16 TEMP 2 51K C152 C163 C151 R166
2 ANT_SEL 180
150pf CR106
14 8
BATT 2_POLE_V
U410 15 AUX FREQ_SW_DA 12
1 4 NPN_DUAL 150pf 150pf 150pf Q152
R162 10 R157
R_T MJD2955
120 23 DATA_IN 17 CR105 1800
SCB1 N3 N2
5 2 4 18 3 2 R167 3 2
FREQ_SW0 SCB2 SWB+
5 19 4 16K
FREQ_SW1 SCB3
6 20 U151A-1 R160 TO U51-PIN 13,14
FREQ_SW2 SCB4 N4 OPAMP_4PIN
6 3 7 R172 C193 680
FREQ_SW3 3
22K 1
VSS CR104 1 1.65VDC(HI)
Q156 N1
13 NU C165
1 NPN 3 0.75VDC(LO)
R412 R413 R193 N2 4700pf
180 MMBT3904 20K
680 6 OPAMP_4PIN
CR103 Q151
2 7 N1 1 MMBT3904
U151A-2 R158
DATA N3 5 NPN
R179 R156 R173 R170 2.31VDC(HI)
3 1
8 1.40VDC(LO) 180
C127 N4
360 3900 NU NU 2
C154 R159
2.91VDC(HI) C166 R169 NU
1.11VDC(LO) .22uf
C159 180
4 2 6800 C157 150pf
DS401 CLK RESET DACLE 150pf C800
LED_DUAL R168
.1uf 100K SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF TRANSMITTER CHAIN
5V .01uf
PMLE4073A UHF (438-470MHZ) 12.5KHZ RF BOARD
GEPD5552

EN_BIAS

RF (Transmitter Module) Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-15

 RF Board 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8480473Z01

RF Board 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing-

8480473Z01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

Capacitor, fixed: pF +/-5%; 50V C73 2113740A32 13

(unless otherwise stated)
C74 2113740A42 36
C13 2113740A59 150 pF, +-30%
C75 2113740A17 3.9; +/-0.25pF
C28 2113740A33 15
C77 2113740A14 3; +/-0.25pF
C29 2113740A07 1.5
C79 2113740A34 16
C30 2113740A59 150
C78 0662057C01 0
C33 2113740A07 1.5
C80 NU
C34 2113741A45 10000
C81 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%
C36 2113740A18 4.3 pF, +-2.5 pF
C82 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%
C37 NU
C83 2113740A59 150
C51 2113740A53 82
C85 2113740A59 150
C53 2113740A37 22
C86 2113740A59 150
C54 2113740A33 15
C87 2113740A59 150
C55 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 16V
C101 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V
C56 2113740A36 20
C102 2311049A07 1.0 uF, 10%; 25V
C57 NU
C103 2113740A59 150
C58 NU
C104 2113740A41 33
C59 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V
C105 2311049J25 10 uF, 10%; 16V
C60 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%
C106 2113740A59 150
C61 2113741A25 1500
C107 2113741A51 18000
C62 2311049A05 0.47 uF, 10%; 25V
C108 2113741A51 18000
C63 2113740A48 51
C109 2113740A41 33
C64 2113740A59 150
C110 2113740A59 150
C66 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 25V
C111 2113740A59 150
C67 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V
C112 2113740A27 8.2 pF, +-0.25 pF
C68 2113741A59 0.039uF
C113 2113740A31 12
C69 2311049J07 3.3 uF, 10%; 20V
C114 2113740A31 12
C70 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%
C115 2113740A17 3.9 pF, +-0.25 pF
C71 2311049J25 10 uF, 10%; 16V
C116 2113740A59 150

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-17

RF Board 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8480473Z01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

C117 NU C206 2113740G46 47, +/-2%

C118 2113740A46 47 C207 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V

C119 NU C208 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V

C120 2113740A59 150 C209 2113740A59 150

C121 2113740A59 150 C210 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V

C122 NU C211 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V

C123 2113740A59 150 C212 2113741A21 1000

C124 2113740A36 20 C214 2311049A07 1.0 uF, 10%; 16V

C125 NU C215 2113741A39 5600

C126 2311049A07 1.0 uF, 10%; 16V C216 2160521G37 0.1 nF, +80%/-20% , 16V

C127 NU C217 2311049J25 10 uF, 10%; 16V

C128 2160521G37 0.1 nF, +80%/-20% , 16V C218 2113741A21 1000

C151 2113740A59 150 C219 2113740A59 150

C152 2113740A59 150 C220 2113740A59 150

C153 2113743A13 0.047uF, 10% 16V C221 2113740A59 150

C154 2113740A59 150 C222 2113741A21 1000

C156 2113740A59 150 C223 2113740A41 33

C157 2113741A45 10000 C224 2113740A59 150

C158 2113741A45 10000 C226 2113740A30 11 pF

C159 2113740A59 150 C227 NU

C162 2113740A59 150 C228 2113740A59 150

C163 2113740A59 150 C229 2113743A23 220 nF

C164 2113740A59 150 C230 2160521G37 100 nF, +80%/-20%

C165 2113741A37 0.0047uF, 50V C231 2113741A45 10000

C166 2311049A03 0.22uF, 10% 35V C232 NU

C193 NU C233 2113740G24 6.8, +/-0.1pF, 50V

C194 NU C235 2113741A51 18000

C199 2113740A59 150 C236 2113740A59 150

C201 NU C237 2113740A55 100

C202 2113741A45 10000 C238 2113740A55 100

C203 2113741A45 10000 C251 2113740A21 5.6 pF, +-2.5 pF, 50V

C204 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V C252 2113740A21 5.6 pF, +-2.5 pF, 50V

C205 2113740A63 220 C253 2113740A40 30

6C.4-18 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8480473Z01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

C254 2113740A14 3.0 pF, +-2.5 pF C418 2311049J25 10 uF, 10%; 16V

C255 2113740A28 9.1 pF, +-2.5 pF C419 2113741A51 18000

C256 2113740A59 150 C421 2311049A05 0.47 uF, 10%; 25V

C257 2113740A59 150 C424 NU

C258 NU C425 NU

C259 2113740A59 150 C426 2113743A23 0.22 uF, 10%, 16V

C260 2113740A21 5.6 pF, +-2.5 pF C427 2113743A23 0.22 uF, 10%, 16V

C261 2113740A20 5.1 pF, +-0.25 pF C428 2113740A59 150

C262 2113740A27 8.2 pF+-0.25 pF C429 2113741A37 4700

C263 2113740A09 1.8 pF, +-0.25pF C430 2113740A59 150

C264 2113740A24 6.8 pF, +-0.25 pF C436 2113740A59 150

C265 2160521G37 0.1 uF, +80%/-20%; 16V C437 2311049A05 0.47 uF, 10%; 25V

C266 2113740A59 150 C438 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V

C267 2113740A59 150 C441 2160521G37 0.1 nF, +80%/-20%, 16V

C268 2113741A21 1000 C442 NU

C269 2113740A59 150 C443 2113740A79 1000

C270 NU C452 2311049J11 4.7 uF, 10%; 16V

C271 NU C454- 2113741A45 10000

C457
C272 2113740A21 5.6 pF, +-2.5 pF
C459 2113740A59 150
C273 2113740A59 150
C460 2113740A59 150
C275 2113740A59 150
C461 2160521G37 0.1 nF, +80%/-20%, 16V
C276 2113741A45 10000
C464 2160521G37 0.1 nF, +80%/-20%, 16V
C278 2311049A03 0.22 uF,10%,35V
C466 2113740A59 150
C279 2311049A03 0.22 uF,10%,35V
C467 2113740A59 150
C280 2113740A59 150
C468 2113740A59 150
C281 2113740A59 150
C469 2113740A46 47
C282 2113740A71 470
C472- 2113740A59 150
C283 2113740A59 150 C476
C284 2113740A03 1, +/-2.5pF C479 2113740A71 470
C285 2113740A59 150 C480 NU
C286 NU C481 2113740A59 150
C409 2113740A59 150 C498 2113740A59 150
C410 2113740A59 150

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-19

RF Board 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8480473Z01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

C499 2113740A59 150 J2 0180117S05 RF jack assembly

C789 2113740A55 100 J3 0180417C01 assembly option jack

C800 2311049A01 0.1 uF, 10%; 35V J5 0180195R03 speaker microphone

header
C801 NU
J6 0180965Z01 connector B+
C802 NU
J200 0904358J02 28-pin interface connector
Filter:
Inductor, Coil:
CF51 9180453B04 mini ceramic filter -6 pole
L9 2462587N43 chip 15 nH, 5%
CF52 9180454B04 mini ceramic filter -4 pole
L10 2483411T63 0.15uH, 5%
Clip:
L11 2462587N46 chip 27 nH, 5%
CL1- 4280138R02 butterfly
CL4 L51 2483411T63 chip shielded

CL6- 4280138R02 butterfly L52 2462587N61 chip 470 nH, 5%

CL9
L53 2462587N69 chip 1200 nH, 5%
Diode:
L54 NU
CR2 4880174R01 DIODE QUAD SOIC 8-pin
L55 2483411T75 1.5uH, 3%
CR51 4880154K03 dual Schottky mixer
L58 2483411T74 chip shielded
CR101 4880973Z02 PIN diode
L101 2411087A19 0.27 uH
CR102 4880973Z02 PIN diode
L102 2411087A19 0.27 uH
CR103- 4880154K03 dual Schottky SOT
CR106 L103 2411087A19 0.27 uH

CR201 4813833C07 dual 100 V L104 2484657R01 ferrite bead

CR202 4813833C07 dual 100 V L105 2484657R01 ferrite bead

CR203 4802245J22 varactor L106 2411087A19 0.27 uH

CR251 4862824C01 varactor L107 2483035N76 coil airwound

CR253 4862824C01 varactor L108 2483035N76 coil airwound

CR255 4862824C01 varactor L109 2483035N76 coil airwound

CR405 4880107R01 silicon rectifier L111 2483035N13 coil air 24AWG 5TNS

Light Emitting Diode: L112 2483035N76 coil airwound

DS401 4805729G49 diode red/yellow L113 NU

Mechanical: L201 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

H101 300136783 screw 2-56" X 5/16"; 2 L203 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
used
L204 2462587N42 chip 12 nH
Connector, Receptacle:
L251 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
J1 3904566J01 antenna contact
L252 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%

6C.4-20 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8480473Z01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

L253 2480145S07 RF coil 1-1/2T brass core Q155 4880214G02 NPN MMBT3904

L254 2462587N49 chip 47 nH, 5% Q156 4880214G02 NPN MMBT3904

L255 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10% Q251 4813827A07 NPN SML SIG
MMBR941LT1
L256 2462587N61 chip 470 nH, 5%
Q405 4805128M67 NPN MMBT3906
L257 2462587N61 chip 470 nH, 5%
Q408 4805128M67 NPN MMBT3906
L258 2480145S08 RF coil 2-1/2 violet toko
Q410 4880141L03 PNP SOT23
L259 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
Q411 4805128M19 SOT-23 MMBTA13
L260 2462587N46 chip 27 nH, 5%
Q412 4805128M67 NPN MMBT3906
L261 0662057C01 0 ohm
Resistor, fixed: ohm +/-5%; 1/8W:
L262 2462587N43 chip 15 nH, 5%
R5 0662057C56 160
L267 2462587N50 chip 56 nH, 5%
R6 0662057C27 10
L268 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
R51 0662057C44 51
L286 2462587Q47 1uH
R52 0662057D12 33K
L403 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
R53 0662057D02 12K
L404 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
R54 0662057C82 2000
L405 2462587N22 chip 390 nH, 10%
R55 0662057C51 100
L406 2462587Q42 Ind chip 390 nH, 10%
R57 0662057D27 130K
L710 2462587N60 chip 390 nH, 5%
R58 0662057D03 13K
L717 2462587N60 chip 390 nH, 5%
R60 0662057D27 130K

R64 0662057C93 5600

T1 2580163M03 XFMR coil
R66 0662057C73 820
T2 2580163M03 XFMR coil
R67 0662057C95 6800
Meter:
R68 0662057C75 1000
M501 4280126S01 PA clip
R101 0680106R01 0.1, +/-1%
M700 0780165R02 BOOT CRYSTAL
R102 0662057C63 330
Transistor:
R104 2113740A16 3.6pF
Q51 4813827A07 NPN SML SIG
MMBR941LT1 R105 0662057C41 39

Q151 4880214G02 NPN MMBT3904 R106 NU

Q152 4813822A10 PNP 60V 10A MJD R151 0660076F29 56.2K, +/-1%
2955T4
R152 0660076F01 100K
Q153 4880214G02 NPN MMBT3904
R153 0662057C35 22
Q154 4880141L03 PNP SOT23
R154 0660076F01 100K

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-21

RF Board 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8480473Z01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

R155 0660076F29 56.2K, +/-1% R253 0662057C79 1500

R156 0662057C89 3900 R254 0662057C99 10K

R157 0662057C81 1800 R255 0662057D01 11K

R158 0662057C57 180 R256 0662057C79 1500

R159 0662057C57 180 R257 0662057D11 30K

R160 0662057C71 680 R258 0662057C51 100

R161 0662057C71 680 R260 0662057C59 220

R162 0662057C53 120 R261 0662057C59 220

R166 0662057C57 180 R262 0662057C53 120

R167 0662057D05 16K R263 0662057D14 39K

R168 0662057D24 100K R264 0662057C51 100

R169 0662057C95 6.8K R408 0662057D07 20K

R170 NU R409 0662057D15 43K

R171 0662057D17 51K R410 0662057D07 20K

R172 0662057D08 22K R411 0662057D15 43K

R173 NU R412 0662057C57 180

R174 0662057D24 100K R413 0662057C71 680

R175 0662057C94 6200 R414 0662057D41 510K

R179 0662057C64 360 R415 0662057D41 510K

R193 0662057C01 0 ohm R416 0662057C51 100

R201 0662057C49 82 R417 0662057C51 100

R202 0662057C83 2200 R424 0662057C51 100

R203 0662057D21 75K R438 0662057C87 3300

R204 0662057D21 75K R447 NU

R205 0662057C87 3300 R448 0662057C01 O

R206 0662057C83 2200 R449 0662057D24 100K

R207 0662057C83 2200 R450 NU

R211 0662057D16 47K R451 0662057C83 2200

R212 NU R452 0662057D30 180K

R215 0662057C75 1000 R460 1880143S03 Volume potentiometer

R216 0662057D09 24K R466 0662057C91 4700

R251 0662057D10 27K R467 0662057C27 10

R252 0662057C99 10K R469 0662057C81 1800

6C.4-22 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 RF Board 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing- 8480473Z01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

R488 0662057D32 220K U252 0180707Y42 UHF Rx module

R489 0611077A12 2.7 U405 5180932W01 linear op-amp

R490 0611077A12 2.7 U409 5180175R01 Audio amplifier

R494 0662057D24 100K U410 5180159R01 dual trans NPNS

R496 0662057C63 330 U708 5105469E65 voltage regulator

R497 0662057C67 470 Zener Diode:

R503 0662057C63 330 VR401 4880140L15 10V Zener

R507 0662057C75 1000 VR704 4813830A18 6.8V

R702 0662057C82 2000 Crystal:

R801 0662057C99 10K Y51A 9180112R06 45.1 Mhz crystal filter

R802 0662057C99 10K Y51B 9180112R06 45.1 Mhz crystal filter

R803 0662057C99 10K Y53 4880606B02 XTAL resonator 44-645

MHz
R804 0662057C99 10K
Y201 4880114R02 crystal 16.8MHz
Shield:
Non-reference Items:
SH100 2680966Y04 synthesizer, front
8480473Z01 PCB, 12.5kHz UHF QFP
SH101 2680970Y04 VCO, front version
SH102 2680136S04 harmonic filter 8404599J03 PCB, Controller board
SH103 2680970Z04 VCO, front 8404627J01 m/board to cont flex
SH104 2680958Z04 MIXER, back 8404628J01 Heatseal flex
SH105 2680968Z04 VCO, back 2604619J01 controller shield
Switch: 1504618J01 Housing (DISPLAY)
PB401 4080485C08 switch tactile 7580437C02 keypad
PB402 4080485C08 switch tactile 6104617J01 Light pipe
PB403 4080485C08 switch tactile 6104622J01 Display lens
SW401 4080650D01 switch freq, 16 positions 6104622J02 Non-display lens
Integrated Circuit: 3304623J01 Name plate
U51 5180207R01 IF 3604642J02 Freq. knob
U101 5105109Z55 RF power module- 3604641J01 Volume knob
LDMOS
7580437C03 PTT KEYPAD
U151 5180932W01 linear op-amp

U152 5105226P38 DAC

U201 5105457W72 synthesizer, QFP

U251 5105226P38 VCO

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-23

6C.4-24 Diagrams and Parts Lists
 RF Schematic Diagram

TP3
T1
1

SHIELD SIDE C14

150pf C27 C28

S5
NU 150pf

R3 C15 C16 C18 C19 C21 C22 C24 C25

1 2 3 4 5 6 1
(G)(IN) (5V)(G) (OUT) (G) T1 TP5
13K 3.0pf 2.4pf 6.2pf 5.6pf 4.7pf 5.1pf 5.1pf 7.5pf
R2
3
TP2 3900 C26
C2 C3 C5 C6 C8 C9 C11 C13 Q1
1 1 8.2pf
T1 NPN
8.2pf 5.6pf 6.2pf 4.7pf 3.6pf 10pf 16pf 11pf C17 C20 C23
MMBR941 S7 S8 S9
C12 2 S6 5.1pf 22pf 16pf 1 T1 TP6
C1
TP1 5.1pf 15pf
S1 C4 S2 C7 C10 R1 TP4
1 9.1pf 10pf S3 13pf 1
T1 S4 4700 T1
CR1

FRONT END RECEIVER MODULE

P/N: 0180707Y42
UHF (438-470MHZ) 12.5KHZ
GEPD5553

RX FE Module Schematic Diagram

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-25

 RX Module 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing - 8480480D01

RX Module 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing -

8480480D01

Circuit Motorola Circuit Motorola

Description Description
Ref Part No. Ref Part No.

Capacitor, Fixed: pF ±0.1% Diode:

(Unless Otherwise Stated)
CR01 4880154K03 SOT MMBD353 RH
C01 2113740G20 Ceramic Chip 5.1 pF DIODE DUAL SCHT

C02 2113740G27 Ceramic Chip 8.2 pF Transistor:

C03 2113740G21 Ceramic Chip 5.6 pF Q01 4813827A07 TSTR NPN SML SIG
MMBR941LT1 7Y
C04 2113740G28 Ceramic Chip 9.1 pF
Resistor, Fixed: Ohm ±5%; 1/8W
C05 2113740G23 Ceramic Chip 6.2 pF
R01 0662057C91 4700
C06 2113740G19 Ceramic Chip 4.7 pF
R02 0662057C89 3900
C07 2113740G29 Ceramic Chip 10pF ±2%
R03 0662057D03 13k
C08 2113740G16 Ceramic Chip 3.6 pF
Non-Referenced Items
C09 2113740G21 Ceramic Chip 5.6 pF
0780102S01 Leadframe
C10 2113740G32 Ceramic Chip 13 pF ±2%
0780102S01 Leadframe
C11 2113740G34 Ceramic Chip 16 pF ±2%
0780102S01 Leadframe
C12 2113740G33 Ceramic Chip 15pF ±2%
0780102S01 Leadframe
C13 2113740G30 Ceramic Chip 11 pF ±2%
2680625B02 Shield Receiver
C14 2113740A59 Ceramic Chip 150pF±30%
8480480D01 Rx Module PCB
C15 2113740G14 Ceramic Chip 3.0 pF

C16 2113740G12 Ceramic Chip 2.4 pF

C17 2113740G20 Ceramic Chip 5.1 pF

C18 2113740G23 Ceramic Chip 6.2 pF

C19 2113740G21 Ceramic Chip 5.6 pF

C20 2113740G37 Ceramic Chip 22 pF ±2%

C21 2113740G19 Ceramic Chip 4.7 pF

C22 2113740G20 Ceramic Chip 5.1 pF

C23 2113740G34 Ceramic Chip 16 pF ±2%

C24 2113740G20 Ceramic Chip 5.1 pF

C25 2113740G25 Ceramic Chip 7.5 pF

C26 2113740G27 Ceramic Chip 8.2 pF

C28 2113740A59 Ceramic Chip 150pF±30%

Diagrams and Parts Lists 6C.4-27

RX Module 438-470MHz 4W 12.5kHz Channel Spacing - 8480480D01

6C.4-28 Diagrams and Parts Lists

 Table of Contents

Appendix A
PL (CTCSS) Codes

Table of Contents

Paragraph Page
1.0 Allowable PL Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

PL (CTCSS) Codes A-i

Table of Contents

A-ii PL (CTCSS) Codes

 Allowable PL Codes

1.0 Allowable PL Codes

The following PL Codes have been tested and are acceptable for programming into any transmit or
receive frequency.

GROUP A GROUP B GROUP C

Code Freq Code Freq Code Freq

XZ 67.0 XA 71.9 WZ 69.3

XB 77.0 YZ 82.5 WA 74.4
YB 88.5 ZA 94.8 WB 79.7
1Z 100.0 1A 103.5 YA 85.4
1B 107.2 2Z 110.0 ZZ 91.5
2A 114.8 2B 118.8 ZB 97.4
3Z 123.0 3A 127.3 5B 162.2
3B 131.8 4Z 136.5 8Z 206.5
4A 141.3 4B 146.2
5Z 151.4 5A 156.7
6A 173.8 6Z 167.9
7Z 186.2 6B 179.9
M1 203.5 7A 192.8
M3 218.1 M2 210.7

PL (CTCSS) Codes A-1

Allowable PL Codes

A-2 PL (CTCSS) Codes